WO2020232845A1 - 一种帧间预测的方法和装置 - Google Patents

一种帧间预测的方法和装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2020232845A1
WO2020232845A1 PCT/CN2019/100751 CN2019100751W WO2020232845A1 WO 2020232845 A1 WO2020232845 A1 WO 2020232845A1 CN 2019100751 W CN2019100751 W CN 2019100751W WO 2020232845 A1 WO2020232845 A1 WO 2020232845A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
block
motion vector
sub
reference frame
processed
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Ceased
Application number
PCT/CN2019/100751
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
陈焕浜
杨海涛
张恋
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Original Assignee
Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority to JP2021568601A priority Critical patent/JP7318007B2/ja
Priority to DK19929484.4T priority patent/DK3955576T3/da
Priority to KR1020257017410A priority patent/KR20250078641A/ko
Priority to EP19929484.4A priority patent/EP3955576B1/en
Priority to PL19929484.4T priority patent/PL3955576T3/pl
Priority to EP24201023.9A priority patent/EP4518316A3/en
Priority to BR112021023118A priority patent/BR112021023118A2/pt
Priority to KR1020217038708A priority patent/KR102814842B1/ko
Priority to ES19929484T priority patent/ES3010207T3/es
Priority to MX2021013316A priority patent/MX2021013316A/es
Priority to CN201980015456.6A priority patent/CN112243586A/zh
Priority to FIEP19929484.4T priority patent/FI3955576T3/fi
Application filed by Huawei Technologies Co Ltd filed Critical Huawei Technologies Co Ltd
Publication of WO2020232845A1 publication Critical patent/WO2020232845A1/zh
Priority to MX2025003391A priority patent/MX2025003391A/es
Priority to US17/529,106 priority patent/US12108046B2/en
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical
Priority to JP2023117744A priority patent/JP7547574B2/ja
Priority to US18/882,668 priority patent/US12519948B2/en
Priority to US19/407,477 priority patent/US20260106992A1/en
Ceased legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/50—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding
    • H04N19/503—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding involving temporal prediction
    • H04N19/51—Motion estimation or motion compensation
    • H04N19/513—Processing of motion vectors
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/50—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding
    • H04N19/503—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding involving temporal prediction
    • H04N19/51—Motion estimation or motion compensation
    • H04N19/513—Processing of motion vectors
    • H04N19/517—Processing of motion vectors by encoding
    • H04N19/52—Processing of motion vectors by encoding by predictive encoding
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/50—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding
    • H04N19/503—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding involving temporal prediction
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/102—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the element, parameter or selection affected or controlled by the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/103—Selection of coding mode or of prediction mode
    • H04N19/105—Selection of the reference unit for prediction within a chosen coding or prediction mode, e.g. adaptive choice of position and number of pixels used for prediction
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/102—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the element, parameter or selection affected or controlled by the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/124—Quantisation
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/134—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the element, parameter or criterion affecting or controlling the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/136—Incoming video signal characteristics or properties
    • H04N19/137—Motion inside a coding unit, e.g. average field, frame or block difference
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/134—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the element, parameter or criterion affecting or controlling the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/136—Incoming video signal characteristics or properties
    • H04N19/14—Coding unit complexity, e.g. amount of activity or edge presence estimation
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/134—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the element, parameter or criterion affecting or controlling the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/157—Assigned coding mode, i.e. the coding mode being predefined or preselected to be further used for selection of another element or parameter
    • H04N19/159—Prediction type, e.g. intra-frame, inter-frame or bidirectional frame prediction
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/169—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/17—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding the unit being an image region, e.g. an object
    • H04N19/176—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding the unit being an image region, e.g. an object the region being a block, e.g. a macroblock
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/10—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding
    • H04N19/169—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding
    • H04N19/186—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using adaptive coding characterised by the coding unit, i.e. the structural portion or semantic portion of the video signal being the object or the subject of the adaptive coding the unit being a colour or a chrominance component
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/42—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals characterised by implementation details or hardware specially adapted for video compression or decompression, e.g. dedicated software implementation
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/50—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding
    • H04N19/503—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding involving temporal prediction
    • H04N19/51—Motion estimation or motion compensation
    • H04N19/577—Motion compensation with bidirectional frame interpolation, i.e. using B-pictures
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/50—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding
    • H04N19/593—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using predictive coding involving spatial prediction techniques
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04N—PICTORIAL COMMUNICATION, e.g. TELEVISION
    • H04N19/00—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals
    • H04N19/90—Methods or arrangements for coding, decoding, compressing or decompressing digital video signals using coding techniques not provided for in groups H04N19/10-H04N19/85, e.g. fractals
    • H04N19/96—Tree coding, e.g. quad-tree coding

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to the field of video coding and decoding, in particular to a method and device for inter-frame prediction of video images.
  • Digital video capabilities can be incorporated into a variety of devices, including digital televisions, digital live broadcast systems, wireless broadcast systems, personal digital assistants (PDAs), laptop or desktop computers, tablet computers, e-book readers, Digital cameras, digital recording devices, digital media players, video game devices, video game consoles, cellular or satellite radio telephones (so-called "smart phones"), video teleconferencing devices, video streaming devices and the like .
  • Digital video devices implement video compression technology, for example, in the standards defined by MPEG-2, MPEG-4, ITU-T H.263, ITU-T H.264/MPEG-4 Part 10 Advanced Video Coding (AVC), Video compression technology described in the video coding standard H.265/High Efficiency Video Coding (HEVC) standard and extensions of such standards.
  • Video devices can transmit, receive, encode, decode, and/or store digital video information more efficiently by implementing such video compression techniques.
  • Video compression techniques perform spatial (intra-image) prediction and/or temporal (inter-image) prediction to reduce or remove redundancy inherent in video sequences.
  • a video slice ie, a video frame or part of a video frame
  • image blocks can also be called tree blocks, coding units (CU) and/or coding nodes .
  • the image block in the to-be intra-coded (I) slice of the image is encoded using spatial prediction about reference samples in neighboring blocks in the same image.
  • the image blocks in the to-be-coded (P or B) slice of the image may use spatial prediction with respect to reference samples in neighboring blocks in the same image or temporal prediction with respect to reference samples in other reference images.
  • the image may be referred to as a frame, and the reference image may be referred to as a reference frame.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a method and device for inter-frame prediction of video images, and corresponding encoders and decoders, which improve the prediction accuracy of motion information of image blocks and reduce implementation complexity.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an inter-frame prediction method, where a block to be processed includes one or more sub-blocks, and the method includes: determining the value of the block to be processed according to spatial neighboring blocks of the block to be processed Time domain offset vector, the time domain offset vector is used to determine the corresponding sub-block of the sub-block of the block to be processed; determine the motion of the sub-block of the block to be processed according to the motion vector of the corresponding sub-block Vector, wherein, when the motion vector of the corresponding sub-block is not available, the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed is obtained according to the first preset motion vector.
  • This embodiment uses the sub-block as the unit for obtaining the motion vector, which improves the accuracy of motion vector prediction and the coding efficiency.
  • the sub-block is obtained based on the preset motion vector. Compared with the method of deriving the default motion vector, the motion vector reduces the complexity of implementation.
  • the determining the time domain offset vector of the to-be-processed block according to the spatial neighboring blocks of the to-be-processed block includes: sequentially checking a plurality of first presets in a preset order Whether the motion vector of the neighboring block in the spatial domain of the position is available, until the motion vector of the neighboring block in the spatial domain is available for the first motion vector in the preset order is obtained; the first motion vector in the preset order is available The obtained motion vector of the neighboring block in the spatial domain is used as the time domain offset vector.
  • a plurality of spatial neighboring blocks are used to obtain a time-domain offset vector, which makes full use of the spatial correlation of the prediction object.
  • the second preset motion vector is used as the time domain offset vector.
  • the second preset motion vector is a zero motion vector.
  • a zero motion vector is used as a backup solution when the motion vectors of adjacent blocks in the spatial domain at multiple preset positions are not available, thereby reducing the complexity of implementation.
  • the determining the time domain offset vector of the to-be-processed block according to the spatial neighboring block of the to-be-processed block includes: acquiring the spatial neighboring block of the second preset position Motion vector and reference frame, wherein the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position is available; the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position is used as the time domain offset vector .
  • the time-domain offset vector is obtained by using adjacent blocks in the spatial domain at the preset position, which eliminates the checking steps in the foregoing embodiment, and further reduces the implementation complexity.
  • the third preset motion vector is used as the time domain offset vector.
  • the third preset motion vector is a zero motion vector.
  • This embodiment adopts a zero motion vector as a backup solution when the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block at the preset position is not available, which reduces the complexity of implementation.
  • the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position includes a first-directional motion vector based on the first reference frame list, and the spatial phase at the second preset position
  • the reference frame of the neighboring block includes the first-directional reference frame corresponding to the first-directional motion vector
  • the using the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position as the time-domain offset vector includes: When the first-direction reference frame and the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located are the same, the first-direction motion vector is used as the time domain offset vector.
  • the method includes: using the third preset motion vector as the time-domain offset vector.
  • the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position further includes the motion vector based on the second reference
  • the second direction motion vector of the frame list the reference frame of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position includes the second direction reference frame corresponding to the second direction motion vector, when the first direction reference frame and the
  • the time domain corresponding blocks of the to-be-processed block are in different image frames, it includes: when the second-direction reference frame and the corresponding sub-block are the same, using the second-direction motion vector as the Time domain offset vector; when the second-direction reference frame and the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located are different, the third preset motion vector is used as the time domain offset vector.
  • the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position includes the motion vector based on the first reference frame The first-direction motion vector of the list and the second-direction motion vector based on the second reference frame list.
  • the reference frame of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position includes the first-direction motion vector corresponding to the first-direction motion vector.
  • the using the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position as the time domain offset vector includes: When the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is located is obtained from the second reference frame list: when the second-direction reference frame is the same as the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is located, the second-direction motion vector is used as The time domain offset vector; when the second-direction reference frame and the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is located are different and the first-direction reference frame and the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is located are the same, the The first-direction motion vector is used as the time-domain offset vector; when the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located is obtained from the first reference frame list: when the first-direction reference frame and the corresponding sub-block are When the image frames where the blocks are located are the same, the first-direction motion vector is used as the time domain offset vector; when the first-direction reference frame and the corresponding sub-block are located in
  • the using the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position as the time domain offset vector includes: when the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is located When the display order of all reference frames in the reference frame list of the block to be processed is acquired from the second reference frame list and the display order of all the reference frames in the block to be processed is before the image frame where the block to be processed is located: When the image frames where the corresponding sub-blocks are located are the same, the second-direction motion vector is used as the time-domain offset vector; when the second-direction reference frame and the image frames where the corresponding sub-blocks are located are different and the When the first-direction reference frame is the same as the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is located, the first-direction motion vector is used as the time domain offset vector; when the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is located is from the first When the display order of at least one reference frame obtained in the reference frame list or in the reference frame list of the to-be-processed block is after the
  • the third preset motion vector is used as the time domain offset vector.
  • the index of the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located in the reference frame list of the spatial neighboring block of the block to be processed is obtained by parsing the code stream.
  • This embodiment enables multiple possibilities for selecting the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is located, and improves the coding performance.
  • the condition that the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block is unavailable includes a combination of one or more of the following: the spatial neighboring block is not coded/decoded; or, the spatial neighboring block The block adopts intra prediction or intra block copy mode; or, the spatial neighboring block does not exist; or, the spatial neighboring block and the block to be processed are located in different coding regions.
  • the coding region includes: an image, a strip, a slice or a slice group.
  • the method before the determining the motion vector of the sub-block of the to-be-processed block, the method further includes: determining whether the motion vector corresponding to the preset position in the corresponding sub-block is available; , The determining the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed includes: when the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block is available, obtaining the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block The motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed; when the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block is not available, the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed is obtained according to the first preset motion vector.
  • the position within the preset block is the geometric center position of the corresponding sub-block.
  • the geometric center position is used as the preset position in the block, and other positions in the block, such as the upper left vertex of the corresponding sub-block, may also be used as the preset position in the block.
  • the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block is not available;
  • the prediction unit where the position in the preset block is located uses inter-frame prediction, the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block is available.
  • the prediction mode is used to determine whether the corresponding sub-block motion vector is available, which further reduces the implementation complexity.
  • the obtaining the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed according to the first preset motion vector includes: using the first preset motion vector as the sub-block of the block to be processed The motion vector of the block.
  • the first preset motion vector is a zero motion vector.
  • the zero motion vector is used as a backup solution for the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed, which further reduces the implementation complexity.
  • the motion vector of the sub-block includes the first-direction sub-block motion vector based on the first reference frame list and/or the second-direction sub-block motion vector based on the second reference frame list, when When the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block is not available, the obtaining the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed according to the first preset motion vector includes: determining the sub-block of the block to be processed Adopt unidirectional prediction based on the first-direction sub-block motion vector, and obtain the first-direction sub-block motion vector of the sub-block of the to-be-processed block according to the first preset motion vector; or determine the to-be-processed block
  • the sub-block of the processing block adopts unidirectional prediction based on the second-direction sub-block motion vector, and the second-direction sub-block motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed is obtained according to the first preset motion vector.
  • the obtaining the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed according to the first preset motion vector includes :
  • the prediction type of the coding region where the block to be processed is located is type B prediction
  • the prediction type of the coding region where the to-be-processed block is located is P-type prediction, determine The sub-block of the block to be processed adopts unidirectional prediction, and the first-directional sub-block motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed is obtained according to the first preset motion vector.
  • the prediction type of the coding area where the block to be processed is located is type B prediction means that the area where the block to be processed is located is a type B area.
  • the block to be processed is located in a B frame, located in a B slice, and located in a B slice. Located in the B slice group and so on, in this case the block to be processed is allowed to use bidirectional prediction, and is also allowed to use unidirectional prediction.
  • the prediction type of the coding area where the block to be processed is located is P type prediction means that the area where the block to be processed is located is a P type area.
  • the block to be processed is located in a P frame, located in a P slice, located in a P slice, located in a P slice Groups and so on, in this case the block to be processed is only allowed to use unidirectional prediction.
  • the acquiring the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed according to the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block includes: based on the first time domain distance difference and the second time domain The ratio of the distance difference, the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block is scaled to obtain the motion vector of the sub-block of the to-be-processed block, wherein the first time-domain distance difference is the to-be-processed The image sequence count difference between the image frame where the block is located and the reference frame of the block to be processed, and the second time domain distance difference is the image sequence of the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is located and the reference frame of the corresponding sub-block Count difference.
  • the index of the reference frame of the to-be-processed block in the reference frame list of the to-be-processed block is obtained by parsing a code stream.
  • the selection of the reference frame has multiple possibilities, and the coding performance is improved.
  • the index of the reference frame of the to-be-processed block in the reference frame list of the to-be-processed block is 0.
  • the bit rate for transmitting related information is saved.
  • the method further includes: performing motion compensation on the sub-block of the to-be-processed block based on the motion vector of the sub-block of the to-be-processed block and the reference frame of the to-be-processed block to obtain the The predicted value of the sub-block of the block to be processed.
  • This prediction method can be used as one of a variety of possible inter-frame predictions, can participate in the construction of a list of candidate prediction vectors, and can be combined with other prediction modes such as merge and affine prediction. And then realize the reconstruction of the block to be processed.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an inter-frame prediction device, where a block to be processed includes one or more sub-blocks, and the device includes: an offset acquisition module, which is configured to determine spatial neighboring blocks of the block to be processed, Determine the time domain offset vector of the to-be-processed block, the time-domain offset vector is used to determine the corresponding sub-block of the sub-block of the to-be-processed block; the motion vector acquisition module is used to determine the corresponding sub-block according to the The motion vector determines the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed, wherein, when the motion vector of the corresponding sub-block is not available, the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed is obtained according to the first preset motion vector .
  • the offset acquisition module is specifically configured to: sequentially check whether the motion vectors of the spatial neighboring blocks at the first preset positions are available in a preset order, until the preset The motion vector of the spatial neighboring block available for the first motion vector in the sequence; the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block available for the first motion vector in the preset sequence is used as the time domain offset vector.
  • the offset acquisition module is specifically configured to: when the motion vectors of the multiple spatial neighboring blocks at the first preset positions are not available, use the second preset motion vector as The time domain offset vector.
  • the second preset motion vector is a zero motion vector.
  • the offset acquisition module is specifically configured to: acquire motion vectors and reference frames of neighboring blocks in space at a second preset position, where the space at the second preset position is adjacent The motion vector of the block is available; the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position is used as the time domain offset vector.
  • the offset acquisition module is specifically configured to: when the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position is not available, use the third preset motion vector as the time Domain offset vector.
  • the third preset motion vector is a zero motion vector.
  • the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position includes a first-directional motion vector based on the first reference frame list, and the spatial phase at the second preset position
  • the reference frame of the neighboring block includes the first-direction reference frame corresponding to the first-direction motion vector
  • the offset acquisition module is specifically configured to: when the first-direction reference frame is different from the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located At the same time, the first motion vector is used as the time domain offset vector.
  • the offset acquisition module is specifically configured to: use the third preset motion vector as The time domain offset vector.
  • the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position further includes the motion vector based on the second reference The second direction motion vector of the frame list
  • the reference frame of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position includes the second direction reference frame corresponding to the second direction motion vector, when the first direction reference frame and the
  • the offset acquisition module is specifically configured to: when the second-direction reference frame and the corresponding sub-block are the same, set the The second direction motion vector is used as the time domain offset vector; when the second direction reference frame and the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located are different, the third preset motion vector is used as the time domain offset vector Shift vector.
  • the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position includes the motion vector based on the first reference frame The first-direction motion vector of the list and the second-direction motion vector based on the second reference frame list.
  • the reference frame of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position includes the first-direction motion vector corresponding to the first-direction motion vector.
  • the offset obtaining module is specifically configured to: when the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located is obtained from the second reference frame list : When the second-direction reference frame is the same as the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located, the second-direction motion vector is used as the time domain offset vector; when the second-direction reference frame and the When the corresponding sub-blocks are in different image frames and the first-direction reference frame and the corresponding sub-block are in the same image frame, the first-direction motion vector is used as the time-domain offset vector; when the corresponding When the image frame in which the sub-block is located is obtained from the first reference frame list: when the first-direction reference frame and the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located are the same, the first-direction motion vector is used as the Time-domain offset vector; when the first-direction reference frame and the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located are different
  • the offset obtaining module is specifically configured to: when the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located is obtained from the second reference frame list and is in the reference frame list of the block to be processed When the display order of all the reference frames is before the image frame where the block to be processed is located: when the second-direction reference frame and the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is located are the same, the second-direction motion vector As the time domain offset vector; when the second-direction reference frame and the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is located are different and the first-direction reference frame and the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is located are the same, set The first motion vector is used as the time domain offset vector; when the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located is obtained from the first reference frame list or at least one of the reference frame lists of the block to be processed When the display order of the reference frame is after the image frame where the block to be processed is located: when the first-direction reference frame and the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is
  • the offset acquisition module is specifically configured to: use the third preset motion vector as the time domain offset vector.
  • the index of the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located in the reference frame list of the spatial neighboring block of the block to be processed is obtained by parsing the code stream.
  • the condition that the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block is unavailable includes a combination of one or more of the following: the spatial neighboring block is not coded/decoded; or, the spatial neighboring block The block adopts intra prediction or intra block copy mode; or, the spatial neighboring block does not exist; or, the spatial neighboring block and the block to be processed are located in different coding regions.
  • the coding region includes: an image, a strip, a slice or a slice group.
  • it further includes: a judging module for judging whether the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block of the corresponding sub-block is available; correspondingly, the motion vector acquiring module is specifically configured to: When the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block is available, obtain the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed according to the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block; when the position in the preset block corresponds to When the motion vector of is not available, the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed is obtained according to the first preset motion vector.
  • the position within the preset block is the geometric center position of the corresponding sub-block.
  • the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block is not available;
  • the prediction unit where the position in the preset block is located uses inter-frame prediction, the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block is available.
  • the motion vector acquiring module is specifically configured to use the first preset motion vector as the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed.
  • the first preset motion vector is a zero motion vector.
  • the motion vector of the sub-block includes the first-direction sub-block motion vector based on the first reference frame list and/or the second-direction sub-block motion vector based on the second reference frame list, when When the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block is not available, the motion vector acquisition module is specifically configured to: determine that the sub-block of the block to be processed adopts unidirectional prediction based on the first-directional sub-block motion vector, And obtain the first-directional sub-block motion vector of the sub-block of the to-be-processed block according to the first preset motion vector; or determine that the sub-block of the to-be-processed block is based on the second-directional sub-block motion vector And obtain the second-directional sub-block motion vector of the sub-block of the to-be-processed block according to the first preset motion vector.
  • the motion vector acquisition module is specifically configured to: when the prediction type of the coding region where the block to be processed is located is B In type prediction, it is determined that the sub-block of the block to be processed adopts bidirectional prediction, and the first-direction sub-block motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed and the sub-block to be processed are respectively obtained according to the first preset motion vector The second-direction sub-block motion vector of the sub-block of the block; when the prediction type of the coding region where the block to be processed is located is P-type prediction, it is determined that the sub-block of the block to be processed adopts unidirectional prediction, and according to the The first preset motion vector obtains the first sub-block motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed.
  • the motion vector acquisition module is specifically configured to: scale the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block based on the ratio of the first time domain distance difference and the second time domain distance difference Processing to obtain the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed, wherein the first time domain distance difference is the difference in the sequence count of the image frame where the block to be processed is located and the reference frame of the block to be processed The second time-domain distance difference is the difference in the sequence count of the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located and the reference frame of the corresponding sub-block.
  • the index of the reference frame of the to-be-processed block in the reference frame list of the to-be-processed block is obtained by parsing a code stream.
  • the index of the reference frame of the to-be-processed block in the reference frame list of the to-be-processed block is 0.
  • a motion compensation module configured to perform processing on the sub-block of the block to be processed based on the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed and the reference frame of the block to be processed Motion compensation to obtain the predicted value of the sub-block of the block to be processed.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a video encoder, where the video encoder is used to encode image blocks and includes: the inter-frame prediction device according to the second aspect of the embodiment of the present application, wherein the inter-frame prediction device Used to predict the motion information of the currently encoded image block based on the target candidate motion information, and determine the predicted pixel value of the currently encoded image block based on the motion information of the currently encoded image block;
  • An entropy coding module configured to encode an index identifier of the target candidate motion information into a code stream, where the index identifier indicates the target candidate motion information used for the currently encoded image block;
  • the reconstruction module is configured to reconstruct the currently coded image block based on the predicted pixel value.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a video decoder, which is used to decode image blocks from a bitstream, and includes: an entropy decoding module, used to decode an index identifier from the bitstream, the index The identifier is used to indicate the target candidate motion information of the currently decoded image block; the inter-frame prediction device according to the second aspect of the embodiment of the present application is used to predict the target candidate motion information indicated by the index identifier Determining the predicted pixel value of the currently decoded image block based on the motion information of the currently decoded image block;
  • the reconstruction module is configured to reconstruct the currently decoded image block based on the predicted pixel value.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an encoding device, including: a non-volatile memory and a processor coupled with each other, the processor calls the program code stored in the memory to execute any one of the first aspect Part or all of the steps of this method.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a decoding device, including: a non-volatile memory and a processor coupled to each other, the processor calls the program code stored in the memory to execute any one of the first aspect Part or all of the steps of this method.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a computer-readable storage medium, the computer-readable storage medium stores program code, wherein the program code includes part or Instructions for all steps.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a computer program product, which when the computer program product runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute part or all of the steps of any method in the first aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides an inter-frame prediction method.
  • a block to be processed includes one or more sub-blocks.
  • the method includes: acquiring spatial neighboring blocks of the block to be processed; Block, obtain a time domain offset vector, the time domain offset vector is used to determine the corresponding sub-block of the sub-block of the to-be-processed block, wherein the neighboring block in the spatial domain has a first reference frame list
  • the first-direction reference frame, and the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located is the same as the first-direction reference frame, the time-domain offset vector is the first-direction motion vector of the spatial neighboring block,
  • the first-direction motion vector corresponds to the first-direction reference frame.
  • the neighboring block in the spatial domain does not have a first-direction reference frame located in the first reference frame list, or the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located and the first-direction reference frame
  • it further includes: the neighboring block in the spatial domain has a second-direction reference frame in the second reference frame list, and the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located is the same as the second-direction reference frame
  • the time-domain offset vector is a second-direction motion vector of the spatial neighboring block, and the second-direction motion vector corresponds to the second-direction reference frame.
  • the acquiring the spatial neighboring block of the to-be-processed block includes: checking whether the spatial neighboring block is available; when the spatial neighboring block is available, acquiring Adjacent blocks of the airspace.
  • the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is located is the same as the first-direction reference frame, including: POC of the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is located and the first-direction reference frame POC is the same.
  • the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located is the same as the second-direction reference frame, including: the POC of the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located and the second-direction reference frame POC is the same.
  • the method further includes: parsing the code stream to obtain index information of the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located.
  • the method further includes: using an image frame having a preset relationship with the block to be processed as the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is located.
  • the preset relationship includes: the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is located is adjacent to the image frame where the block to be processed is located in the decoding order, and is earlier than the image frame where the block to be processed is located.
  • the image frame where the block is located is decoded.
  • the preset relationship includes: the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located is a reference frame index in the first-direction reference frame list or the second-direction reference frame list of the block to be processed The reference frame is 0.
  • the neighboring block in the spatial domain does not have a second-direction reference frame in the second reference frame list, or the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located and the second-direction reference frame
  • it further includes: using a zero motion vector as the time domain offset vector.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a video encoding and decoding device, including: a non-volatile memory and a processor coupled with each other, and the processor calls the program code stored in the memory to execute the The method described in the aspect.
  • FIG. 1A is a block diagram of an example of a video encoding and decoding system 10 used to implement an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 1B is a block diagram of an example of a video decoding system 40 used to implement an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 2 is a block diagram of an example structure of an encoder 20 used to implement an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram of an example structure of a decoder 30 used to implement an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram of an example of a video decoding device 400 used to implement an embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 5 is a block diagram of another example of an encoding device or a decoding device for implementing an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 6 is an exemplary schematic diagram of spatial neighboring blocks and time domain reference blocks used to implement embodiments of the present invention.
  • FIG. 7 is an exemplary schematic diagram of an AMVP prediction mode used to implement an embodiment of the present invention.
  • Fig. 8 is an exemplary schematic diagram of sub-blocks used to implement an embodiment of the present invention.
  • Fig. 9 is an exemplary flow chart of an inter-frame prediction method for implementing an embodiment of the present invention.
  • Fig. 10 is an exemplary schematic diagram for implementing the motion vector scaling processing of the embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 11 is an exemplary schematic diagram of sub-blocks and their corresponding sub-blocks of a block to be processed for implementing an embodiment of the present invention
  • FIG. 12 is an exemplary flowchart of another inter-frame prediction method used to implement an embodiment of the present invention.
  • Fig. 13 is an exemplary block diagram of an inter-frame prediction apparatus for implementing an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the corresponding device may include one or more units such as functional units to perform the described one or more method steps (for example, one unit performs one or more steps) , Or multiple units, each of which performs one or more of multiple steps), even if such one or more units are not explicitly described or illustrated in the drawings.
  • the corresponding method may include one step to perform the functionality of one or more units (for example, one step performs one or more units). The functionality, or multiple steps, each of which performs the functionality of one or more of the multiple units), even if such one or more steps are not explicitly described or illustrated in the drawings.
  • the technical solutions involved in the embodiments of the present invention may not only be applied to existing video coding standards (such as H.264, HEVC and other standards), but may also be applied to future video coding standards (such as H.266 standard).
  • the terms used in the embodiment of the present invention are only used to explain specific embodiments of the present invention, and are not intended to limit the present invention. The following briefly introduces some concepts that may be involved in the embodiments of the present invention.
  • Video coding generally refers to processing a sequence of pictures that form a video or video sequence.
  • the terms "picture”, "frame” or “image” can be used as synonyms.
  • Video encoding used in this article means video encoding or video decoding.
  • Video encoding is performed on the source side and usually includes processing (for example, by compressing) the original video picture to reduce the amount of data required to represent the video picture, so as to store and/or transmit more efficiently.
  • Video decoding is performed on the destination side and usually involves inverse processing relative to the encoder to reconstruct the video picture.
  • the “encoding” of video pictures involved in the embodiments should be understood as involving “encoding” or “decoding” of a video sequence.
  • the combination of the encoding part and the decoding part is also called codec (encoding and decoding).
  • a video sequence includes a series of pictures, the pictures are further divided into slices, and the slices are divided into blocks.
  • Video coding is performed in units of blocks.
  • the concept of blocks is further expanded.
  • MB macroblock
  • the macroblock can be further divided into multiple prediction blocks (partitions) that can be used for predictive coding.
  • HEVC high-efficiency video coding
  • basic concepts such as coding unit (CU), prediction unit (PU), and transform unit (TU) are used.
  • CU coding unit
  • PU prediction unit
  • TU transform unit
  • a variety of block units are divided, and a new tree-based structure is used for description.
  • the CU can be divided into smaller CUs according to the quadtree, and the smaller CUs can be further divided to form a quadtree structure.
  • the CU is a basic unit for dividing and encoding the coded image.
  • PU can correspond to prediction block and is the basic unit of prediction coding.
  • the CU is further divided into multiple PUs according to the division mode.
  • the TU can correspond to the transform block and is the basic unit for transforming the prediction residual.
  • no matter CU, PU or TU they all belong to the concept of block (or image block) in nature.
  • a CTU is split into multiple CUs by using a quadtree structure represented as a coding tree.
  • a decision is made at the CU level whether to use inter-picture (temporal) or intra-picture (spatial) prediction to encode picture regions.
  • Each CU can be further split into one, two or four PUs according to the PU split type.
  • the same prediction process is applied in a PU, and relevant information is transmitted to the decoder on the basis of the PU.
  • the CU may be divided into transform units (TU) according to other quadtree structures similar to the coding tree used for the CU.
  • quad-tree and binary tree Quad-tree and binary tree (Quad-tree and Binary Tree, QTBT) are used to divide frames to divide coding blocks.
  • the CU may have a square or rectangular shape.
  • the image block to be encoded in the currently encoded image may be referred to as the current block.
  • a reference block is a block that provides a reference signal for the current block, where the reference signal represents the pixel value in the image block.
  • the block in the reference image that provides the prediction signal for the current block may be a prediction block, where the prediction signal represents the pixel value or sample value or sample signal in the prediction block. For example, after traversing multiple reference blocks, the best reference block is found. This best reference block will provide prediction for the current block, and this block is called a prediction block.
  • the original video picture can be reconstructed, that is, the reconstructed video picture has the same quality as the original video picture (assuming no transmission loss or other data loss during storage or transmission).
  • quantization is performed to perform further compression to reduce the amount of data required to represent the video picture, and the decoder side cannot completely reconstruct the video picture, that is, the quality of the reconstructed video picture is compared with the original video picture The quality is low or poor.
  • Video coding standards of H.261 belong to "lossy hybrid video coding and decoding” (that is, combining spatial and temporal prediction in the sample domain with 2D transform coding for applying quantization in the transform domain).
  • Each picture of a video sequence is usually divided into a set of non-overlapping blocks, and is usually coded at the block level.
  • the encoder side usually processes the video at the block (video block) level, that is, encodes the video.
  • the prediction block is generated by spatial (intra-picture) prediction and temporal (inter-picture) prediction, from the current block (currently processed or to be processed).
  • the processed block subtracts the prediction block to obtain the residual block, transforms the residual block in the transform domain and quantizes the residual block to reduce the amount of data to be transmitted (compressed), and the decoder side will process the inverse of the encoder Partially applied to the coded or compressed block to reconstruct the current block for representation.
  • the encoder duplicates the decoder processing loop, so that the encoder and the decoder generate the same prediction (for example, intra prediction and inter prediction) and/or reconstruction for processing, that is, to encode subsequent blocks.
  • FIG. 1A exemplarily shows a schematic block diagram of a video encoding and decoding system 10 to which an embodiment of the present invention is applied.
  • the video encoding and decoding system 10 may include a source device 12 and a destination device 14.
  • the source device 12 generates encoded video data. Therefore, the source device 12 may be referred to as a video encoding device.
  • the destination device 14 can decode the encoded video data generated by the source device 12, and therefore, the destination device 14 can be referred to as a video decoding device.
  • Various implementations of source device 12, destination device 14, or both may include one or more processors and memory coupled to the one or more processors.
  • the memory may include, but is not limited to, RAM, ROM, EEPROM, flash memory, or any other medium that can be used to store desired program codes in the form of instructions or data structures accessible by a computer, as described herein.
  • the source device 12 and the destination device 14 may include various devices, including desktop computers, mobile computing devices, notebook (for example, laptop) computers, tablet computers, set-top boxes, telephone handsets such as so-called "smart" phones. Computers, televisions, cameras, display devices, digital media players, video game consoles, on-board computers, wireless communication equipment, or the like.
  • FIG. 1A shows the source device 12 and the destination device 14 as separate devices
  • the device embodiment may also include the source device 12 and the destination device 14 or the functionality of both, that is, the source device 12 or the corresponding The functionality of the destination device 14 or the corresponding functionality.
  • the same hardware and/or software may be used, or separate hardware and/or software, or any combination thereof may be used to implement the source device 12 or the corresponding functionality and the destination device 14 or the corresponding functionality .
  • the source device 12 and the destination device 14 may communicate with each other via a link 13, and the destination device 14 may receive encoded video data from the source device 12 via the link 13.
  • Link 13 may include one or more media or devices capable of moving encoded video data from source device 12 to destination device 14.
  • link 13 may include one or more communication media that enable source device 12 to transmit encoded video data directly to destination device 14 in real time.
  • the source device 12 may modulate the encoded video data according to a communication standard, such as a wireless communication protocol, and may transmit the modulated video data to the destination device 14.
  • the one or more communication media may include wireless and/or wired communication media, such as a radio frequency (RF) spectrum or one or more physical transmission lines.
  • RF radio frequency
  • the one or more communication media may form part of a packet-based network, such as a local area network, a wide area network, or a global network (e.g., the Internet).
  • the one or more communication media may include routers, switches, base stations, or other devices that facilitate communication from source device 12 to destination device 14.
  • the source device 12 includes an encoder 20, and optionally, the source device 12 may also include a picture source 16, a picture preprocessor 18, and a communication interface 22.
  • the encoder 20, the picture source 16, the picture preprocessor 18, and the communication interface 22 may be hardware components in the source device 12, or may be software programs in the source device 12. They are described as follows:
  • the picture source 16 which can include or can be any type of picture capture device, for example to capture real-world pictures, and/or any type of pictures or comments (for screen content encoding, some text on the screen is also considered to be encoded Picture or part of an image) generating equipment, for example, a computer graphics processor for generating computer animation pictures, or for obtaining and/or providing real world pictures, computer animation pictures (for example, screen content, virtual reality, VR) pictures), and/or any combination thereof (for example, augmented reality (AR) pictures).
  • the picture source 16 may be a camera for capturing pictures or a memory for storing pictures.
  • the picture source 16 may also include any type of (internal or external) interface for storing previously captured or generated pictures and/or acquiring or receiving pictures.
  • the picture source 16 When the picture source 16 is a camera, the picture source 16 may be, for example, a local or an integrated camera integrated in the source device; when the picture source 16 is a memory, the picture source 16 may be local or, for example, an integrated camera integrated in the source device. Memory.
  • the interface When the picture source 16 includes an interface, the interface may be, for example, an external interface for receiving pictures from an external video source.
  • the external video source is, for example, an external picture capturing device, such as a camera, an external memory, or an external picture generating device, such as It is an external computer graphics processor, computer or server.
  • the interface can be any type of interface according to any proprietary or standardized interface protocol, such as a wired or wireless interface, and an optical interface.
  • a picture can be regarded as a two-dimensional array or matrix of picture elements.
  • the pixel points in the array can also be called sampling points.
  • the number of sampling points of the array or picture in the horizontal and vertical directions (or axis) defines the size and/or resolution of the picture.
  • three color components are usually used, that is, pictures can be represented as or contain three sample arrays.
  • a picture includes corresponding red, green, and blue sample arrays.
  • each pixel is usually expressed in a luminance/chrominance format or color space.
  • a picture in the YUV format includes the luminance component indicated by Y (sometimes indicated by L) and the two indicated by U and V. Chrominance components.
  • the luma component Y represents brightness or gray level intensity (for example, the two are the same in a grayscale picture), and the two chroma components U and V represent chroma or color information components.
  • a picture in the YUV format includes a luminance sample array of luminance sample values (Y), and two chrominance sample arrays of chrominance values (U and V).
  • Pictures in RGB format can be converted or converted to YUV format, and vice versa. This process is also called color conversion or conversion. If the picture is black and white, the picture may only include the luminance sample array.
  • the picture transmitted from the picture source 16 to the picture processor may also be referred to as original picture data 17.
  • the picture preprocessor 18 is configured to receive the original picture data 17 and perform preprocessing on the original picture data 17 to obtain the preprocessed picture 19 or the preprocessed picture data 19.
  • the pre-processing performed by the picture pre-processor 18 may include trimming, color format conversion (for example, conversion from RGB format to YUV format), toning, or denoising.
  • the encoder 20 (or video encoder 20) is configured to receive the pre-processed picture data 19, and process the pre-processed picture data 19 using a relevant prediction mode (such as the prediction mode in the various embodiments herein), thereby
  • the encoded picture data 21 is provided (the structure details of the encoder 20 will be described further based on FIG. 2 or FIG. 4 or FIG. 5).
  • the encoder 20 may be used to implement the various embodiments described below to realize the application of the chrominance block prediction method described in the present invention on the encoding side.
  • the communication interface 22 can be used to receive the encoded picture data 21, and can transmit the encoded picture data 21 to the destination device 14 or any other device (such as a memory) via the link 13 for storage or direct reconstruction, so The other device can be any device used for decoding or storage.
  • the communication interface 22 may be used, for example, to encapsulate the encoded picture data 21 into a suitable format, such as a data packet, for transmission on the link 13.
  • the destination device 14 includes a decoder 30, and optionally, the destination device 14 may also include a communication interface 28, a picture post processor 32, and a display device 34. They are described as follows:
  • the communication interface 28 may be used to receive the encoded picture data 21 from the source device 12 or any other source, for example, a storage device, and the storage device is, for example, an encoded picture data storage device.
  • the communication interface 28 can be used to transmit or receive the encoded picture data 21 via the link 13 between the source device 12 and the destination device 14 or via any type of network.
  • the link 13 is, for example, a direct wired or wireless connection.
  • the type of network is, for example, a wired or wireless network or any combination thereof, or any type of private network and public network, or any combination thereof.
  • the communication interface 28 may be used, for example, to decapsulate the data packet transmitted by the communication interface 22 to obtain the encoded picture data 21.
  • Both the communication interface 28 and the communication interface 22 can be configured as a one-way communication interface or a two-way communication interface, and can be used, for example, to send and receive messages to establish connections, confirm and exchange any other communication links and/or, for example, encoded picture data Information about the transmission of the transmitted data.
  • the decoder 30 (or referred to as the decoder 30) is used to receive the encoded picture data 21 and provide the decoded picture data 31 or the decoded picture 31 (below will further describe the decoder 30 based on Figure 3 or Figure 4 or Figure 5 Structural details).
  • the decoder 30 may be used to implement the various embodiments described below to realize the application of the chrominance block prediction method described in the present invention on the decoding side.
  • the picture post processor 32 is configured to perform post-processing on the decoded picture data 31 (also referred to as reconstructed picture data) to obtain post-processed picture data 33.
  • the post-processing performed by the picture post-processor 32 may include: color format conversion (for example, conversion from YUV format to RGB format), toning, trimming or resampling, or any other processing, and can also be used to convert post-processed picture data 33 is transmitted to the display device 34.
  • the display device 34 is configured to receive the post-processed image data 33 to display the image to, for example, users or viewers.
  • the display device 34 may be or may include any type of display for presenting reconstructed pictures, for example, an integrated or external display or monitor.
  • the display may include a liquid crystal display (LCD), an organic light emitting diode (OLED) display, a plasma display, a projector, a micro LED display, a liquid crystal on silicon (LCoS), Digital light processor (digital light processor, DLP) or any other type of display.
  • FIG. 1A shows the source device 12 and the destination device 14 as separate devices
  • the device embodiment may also include the source device 12 and the destination device 14 or the functionality of both, that is, the source device 12 or Corresponding functionality and destination device 14 or corresponding functionality.
  • the same hardware and/or software may be used, or separate hardware and/or software, or any combination thereof may be used to implement the source device 12 or the corresponding functionality and the destination device 14 or the corresponding functionality .
  • the source device 12 and the destination device 14 may include any of a variety of devices, including any type of handheld or stationary device, for example, a notebook or laptop computer, mobile phone, smart phone, tablet or tablet computer, video camera, desktop Computers, set-top boxes, televisions, cameras, in-vehicle devices, display devices, digital media players, video game consoles, video streaming devices (such as content service servers or content distribution servers), broadcast receiver devices, broadcast transmitter devices And so on, and can not use or use any type of operating system.
  • a notebook or laptop computer mobile phone, smart phone, tablet or tablet computer
  • video camera desktop Computers
  • set-top boxes televisions, cameras, in-vehicle devices, display devices, digital media players, video game consoles, video streaming devices (such as content service servers or content distribution servers), broadcast receiver devices, broadcast transmitter devices And so on, and can not use or use any type of operating system.
  • Both the encoder 20 and the decoder 30 can be implemented as any of various suitable circuits, for example, one or more microprocessors, digital signal processors (digital signal processors, DSP), and application-specific integrated circuits (application-specific integrated circuits). circuit, ASIC), field-programmable gate array (FPGA), discrete logic, hardware, or any combination thereof.
  • the device can store the instructions of the software in a suitable non-transitory computer-readable storage medium, and can use one or more processors to execute the instructions in hardware to execute the technology of the present disclosure . Any of the foregoing content (including hardware, software, a combination of hardware and software, etc.) can be regarded as one or more processors.
  • the video encoding and decoding system 10 shown in FIG. 1A is only an example, and the technology of this application can be applied to video encoding settings that do not necessarily include any data communication between encoding and decoding devices (for example, video encoding or video encoding). decoding).
  • the data can be retrieved from local storage, streamed on the network, etc.
  • the video encoding device can encode data and store the data to the memory, and/or the video decoding device can retrieve the data from the memory and decode the data.
  • encoding and decoding are performed by devices that do not communicate with each other but only encode data to the memory and/or retrieve data from the memory and decode the data.
  • FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram of an example of a video coding system 40 including the encoder 20 of FIG. 2 and/or the decoder 30 of FIG. 3 according to an exemplary embodiment.
  • the video decoding system 40 can implement a combination of various technologies in the embodiments of the present invention.
  • the video coding system 40 may include an imaging device 41, an encoder 20, a decoder 30 (and/or a video encoder/decoder implemented by the logic circuit 47 of the processing unit 46), and an antenna 42 , One or more processors 43, one or more memories 44 and/or display devices 45.
  • the imaging device 41, the antenna 42, the processing unit 46, the logic circuit 47, the encoder 20, the decoder 30, the processor 43, the memory 44, and/or the display device 45 can communicate with each other.
  • the encoder 20 and the decoder 30 are used to illustrate the video coding system 40, in different examples, the video coding system 40 may include only the encoder 20 or only the decoder 30.
  • antenna 42 may be used to transmit or receive an encoded bitstream of video data.
  • the display device 45 may be used to present video data.
  • the logic circuit 47 may be implemented by the processing unit 46.
  • the processing unit 46 may include application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) logic, a graphics processor, a general-purpose processor, and so on.
  • the video decoding system 40 may also include an optional processor 43, and the optional processor 43 may similarly include application-specific integrated circuit (ASIC) logic, a graphics processor, a general-purpose processor, and the like.
  • the logic circuit 47 may be implemented by hardware, such as dedicated hardware for video encoding, and the processor 43 may be implemented by general software, an operating system, and the like.
  • the memory 44 may be any type of memory, such as volatile memory (for example, static random access memory (Static Random Access Memory, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (Dynamic Random Access Memory, DRAM), etc.) or non-volatile memory. Memory (for example, flash memory, etc.), etc.
  • volatile memory for example, static random access memory (Static Random Access Memory, SRAM), dynamic random access memory (Dynamic Random Access Memory, DRAM), etc.
  • Memory for example, flash memory, etc.
  • the memory 44 may be implemented by cache memory.
  • the logic circuit 47 may access the memory 44 (e.g., to implement an image buffer).
  • the logic circuit 47 and/or the processing unit 46 may include memory (e.g., a cache, etc.) for implementing image buffers and the like.
  • the encoder 20 implemented by logic circuits may include an image buffer (e.g., implemented by the processing unit 46 or the memory 44) and a graphics processing unit (e.g., implemented by the processing unit 46).
  • the graphics processing unit may be communicatively coupled to the image buffer.
  • the graphics processing unit may include an encoder 20 implemented by a logic circuit 47 to implement various modules discussed with reference to FIG. 2 and/or any other encoder system or subsystem described herein.
  • Logic circuits can be used to perform the various operations discussed herein.
  • decoder 30 may be implemented by logic circuit 47 in a similar manner to implement the various modules discussed with reference to decoder 30 of FIG. 3 and/or any other decoder systems or subsystems described herein.
  • the decoder 30 implemented by logic circuits may include an image buffer (implemented by the processing unit 2820 or the memory 44) and a graphics processing unit (implemented by the processing unit 46, for example).
  • the graphics processing unit may be communicatively coupled to the image buffer.
  • the graphics processing unit may include a decoder 30 implemented by a logic circuit 47 to implement the various modules discussed with reference to FIG. 3 and/or any other decoder systems or subsystems described herein.
  • antenna 42 may be used to receive an encoded bitstream of video data.
  • the encoded bitstream may include data, indicators, index values, mode selection data, etc., related to the encoded video frame discussed herein, such as data related to coded partitions (e.g., transform coefficients or quantized transform coefficients). , (As discussed) optional indicators, and/or data defining code partitions).
  • the video coding system 40 may also include a decoder 30 coupled to the antenna 42 and used to decode the encoded bitstream.
  • the display device 45 is used to present video frames.
  • the decoder 30 may be used to perform the reverse process.
  • the decoder 30 can be used to receive and parse such syntax elements, and decode related video data accordingly.
  • the encoder 20 may entropy encode the syntax elements into an encoded video bitstream. In such instances, the decoder 30 can parse such syntax elements and decode related video data accordingly.
  • the motion vector prediction method described in the embodiment of the present invention is mainly used for the inter-frame prediction process. This process exists in both the encoder 20 and the decoder 30.
  • the encoder 20 and the decoder 30 in the embodiment of the present invention can be, for example, an encoder/decoder corresponding to video standard protocols such as H.263, H.264, HEVV, MPEG-2, MPEG-4, VP8, VP9, or next-generation video standard protocols (such as H.266, etc.).
  • Fig. 2 shows a schematic/conceptual block diagram of an example of an encoder 20 for implementing an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the encoder 20 includes a residual calculation unit 204, a transformation processing unit 206, a quantization unit 208, an inverse quantization unit 210, an inverse transformation processing unit 212, a reconstruction unit 214, a buffer 216, and a loop filter.
  • Unit 220 a decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230, a prediction processing unit 260, and an entropy coding unit 270.
  • the prediction processing unit 260 may include an inter prediction unit 244, an intra prediction unit 254, and a mode selection unit 262.
  • the inter prediction unit 244 may include a motion estimation unit and a motion compensation unit (not shown).
  • the encoder 20 shown in FIG. 2 may also be referred to as a hybrid video encoder or a video encoder according to a hybrid video codec.
  • the residual calculation unit 204, the transform processing unit 206, the quantization unit 208, the prediction processing unit 260, and the entropy encoding unit 270 form the forward signal path of the encoder 20, and for example, the inverse quantization unit 210, the inverse transform processing unit 212, and the The structure unit 214, the buffer 216, the loop filter 220, the decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230, and the prediction processing unit 260 form the backward signal path of the encoder, wherein the backward signal path of the encoder corresponds to The signal path of the decoder (see decoder 30 in FIG. 3).
  • the encoder 20 receives the picture 201 or the image block 203 of the picture 201 through, for example, an input 202, for example, a picture in a picture sequence that forms a video or a video sequence.
  • the image block 203 may also be called the current picture block or the picture block to be encoded
  • the picture 201 may be called the current picture or the picture to be encoded (especially when the current picture is distinguished from other pictures in video encoding, the other pictures are for example the same video sequence). That is, the previous coded and/or decoded picture in the video sequence that also includes the current picture).
  • the embodiment of the encoder 20 may include a segmentation unit (not shown in FIG. 2) for segmenting the picture 201 into a plurality of blocks such as the image block 203, usually into a plurality of non-overlapping blocks.
  • the segmentation unit can be used to use the same block size and the corresponding grid defining the block size for all pictures in the video sequence, or to change the block size between pictures or subsets or groups of pictures, and divide each picture into The corresponding block.
  • the prediction processing unit 260 of the encoder 20 may be used to perform any combination of the aforementioned segmentation techniques.
  • the image block 203 is also or can be regarded as a two-dimensional array or matrix of sampling points with sample values, although its size is smaller than that of the picture 201.
  • the image block 203 may include, for example, one sampling array (for example, a luminance array in the case of a black-and-white picture 201) or three sampling arrays (for example, one luminance array and two chrominance arrays in the case of a color picture) or Any other number and/or type of array depending on the color format applied.
  • the number of sampling points in the horizontal and vertical directions (or axes) of the image block 203 defines the size of the image block 203.
  • the encoder 20 shown in FIG. 2 is used to encode the picture 201 block by block, for example, to perform encoding and prediction on each image block 203.
  • the residual calculation unit 204 is configured to calculate the residual block 205 based on the picture image block 203 and the prediction block 265 (other details of the prediction block 265 are provided below), for example, by subtracting the sample value of the picture image block 203 sample by sample (pixel by pixel). The sample value of the block 265 is de-predicted to obtain the residual block 205 in the sample domain.
  • the transform processing unit 206 is configured to apply a transform such as discrete cosine transform (DCT) or discrete sine transform (DST) on the sample values of the residual block 205 to obtain transform coefficients 207 in the transform domain.
  • a transform such as discrete cosine transform (DCT) or discrete sine transform (DST)
  • DCT discrete cosine transform
  • DST discrete sine transform
  • the transform coefficient 207 may also be referred to as a transform residual coefficient, and represents the residual block 205 in the transform domain.
  • the transform processing unit 206 may be used to apply an integer approximation of DCT/DST, such as the transform specified for HEVC/H.265. Compared with the orthogonal DCT transform, this integer approximation is usually scaled by a factor. In order to maintain the norm of the residual block processed by the forward and inverse transformation, an additional scaling factor is applied as part of the transformation process.
  • the scaling factor is usually selected based on certain constraints. For example, the scaling factor is a trade-off between the power of 2 used for the shift operation, the bit depth of the transform coefficient, accuracy, and implementation cost.
  • the inverse transformation processing unit 212 for the inverse transformation designate a specific scaling factor, and accordingly, the encoder The 20 side uses the transformation processing unit 206 to specify a corresponding scaling factor for the positive transformation.
  • the quantization unit 208 is used to quantize the transform coefficient 207 by applying scalar quantization or vector quantization, for example, to obtain the quantized transform coefficient 209.
  • the quantized transform coefficient 209 may also be referred to as a quantized residual coefficient 209.
  • the quantization process can reduce the bit depth associated with some or all of the transform coefficients 207. For example, n-bit transform coefficients can be rounded down to m-bit transform coefficients during quantization, where n is greater than m.
  • the degree of quantization can be modified by adjusting the quantization parameter (QP). For example, for scalar quantization, different scales can be applied to achieve finer or coarser quantization.
  • QP quantization parameter
  • a smaller quantization step size corresponds to a finer quantization
  • a larger quantization step size corresponds to a coarser quantization.
  • the appropriate quantization step size can be indicated by a quantization parameter (QP).
  • the quantization parameter may be an index of a predefined set of suitable quantization steps.
  • a smaller quantization parameter can correspond to fine quantization (smaller quantization step size)
  • a larger quantization parameter can correspond to coarse quantization (larger quantization step size)
  • Quantization may include division by a quantization step size and corresponding quantization or inverse quantization performed by, for example, inverse quantization 210, or may include multiplication by a quantization step size.
  • Embodiments according to some standards such as HEVC may use quantization parameters to determine the quantization step size.
  • the quantization step size can be calculated based on the quantization parameter using a fixed-point approximation of an equation including division. Additional scaling factors can be introduced for quantization and inverse quantization to restore the norm of the residual block that may be modified due to the scale used in the fixed-point approximation of the equations for the quantization step size and the quantization parameter.
  • the scales of inverse transform and inverse quantization may be combined.
  • a custom quantization table can be used and signaled from the encoder to the decoder in, for example, a bitstream. Quantization is a lossy operation, where the larger the quantization step, the greater the loss.
  • the inverse quantization unit 210 is configured to apply the inverse quantization of the quantization unit 208 on the quantized coefficients to obtain the inverse quantized coefficients 211, for example, based on or use the same quantization step size as the quantization unit 208, and apply the quantization scheme applied by the quantization unit 208 The inverse quantification scheme.
  • the inversely quantized coefficient 211 may also be referred to as the inversely quantized residual coefficient 211, which corresponds to the transform coefficient 207, although the loss due to quantization is usually different from the transform coefficient.
  • the inverse transform processing unit 212 is used to apply the inverse transform of the transform applied by the transform processing unit 206, for example, an inverse discrete cosine transform (DCT) or an inverse discrete sine transform (DST), so as to be in the sample domain Obtain the inverse transform block 213.
  • the inverse transformation block 213 may also be referred to as an inverse transformation and inverse quantization block 213 or an inverse transformation residual block 213.
  • the reconstruction unit 214 (for example, the summer 214) is used to add the inverse transform block 213 (that is, the reconstructed residual block 213) to the prediction block 265 to obtain the reconstructed block 215 in the sample domain, for example, The sample value of the reconstructed residual block 213 and the sample value of the prediction block 265 are added.
  • the buffer unit 216 (or “buffer” 216 for short) such as the line buffer 216 is used to buffer or store the reconstructed block 215 and the corresponding sample value, for example, for intra prediction.
  • the encoder can be used to use the unfiltered reconstructed block and/or the corresponding sample value stored in the buffer unit 216 to perform any type of estimation and/or prediction, such as intra-frame prediction.
  • the embodiment of the encoder 20 may be configured such that the buffer unit 216 is used not only for storing the reconstructed block 215 for intra prediction 254, but also for the loop filter unit 220 (not shown in FIG. 2 Out), and/or, for example, the buffer unit 216 and the decoded picture buffer unit 230 form one buffer.
  • Other embodiments may be used to use the filtered block 221 and/or blocks or samples from the decoded picture buffer 230 (neither shown in FIG. 2) as the input or basis for the intra prediction 254.
  • the loop filter unit 220 (or “loop filter” 220 for short) is used to filter the reconstructed block 215 to obtain the filtered block 221, thereby smoothly performing pixel conversion or improving video quality.
  • the loop filter unit 220 is intended to represent one or more loop filters, such as deblocking filters, sample-adaptive offset (SAO) filters or other filters, such as bilateral filters, auto Adaptive loop filter (ALF), or sharpening or smoothing filter, or collaborative filter.
  • the loop filter unit 220 is shown as an in-loop filter in FIG. 2, in other configurations, the loop filter unit 220 may be implemented as a post-loop filter.
  • the filtered block 221 may also be referred to as a filtered reconstructed block 221.
  • the decoded picture buffer 230 may store the reconstructed coded block after the loop filter unit 220 performs a filtering operation on the reconstructed coded block.
  • the embodiment of the encoder 20 may be used to output loop filter parameters (e.g., sample adaptive offset information), for example, directly output or by the entropy encoding unit 270 or any other
  • the entropy coding unit outputs after entropy coding, for example, so that the decoder 30 can receive and apply the same loop filter parameters for decoding.
  • the decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230 may be a reference picture memory that stores reference picture data for the encoder 20 to encode video data.
  • DPB 230 can be formed by any of a variety of memory devices, such as dynamic random access memory (DRAM) (including synchronous DRAM (SDRAM), magnetoresistive RAM (MRAM), resistive RAM) (resistive RAM, RRAM)) or other types of memory devices.
  • DRAM dynamic random access memory
  • SDRAM synchronous DRAM
  • MRAM magnetoresistive RAM
  • RRAM resistive RAM
  • the DPB 230 and the buffer 216 may be provided by the same memory device or by separate memory devices.
  • a decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230 is used to store the filtered block 221.
  • the decoded picture buffer 230 may be further used to store other previous filtered blocks of the same current picture or different pictures such as the previously reconstructed picture, such as the previously reconstructed and filtered block 221, and may provide a complete previous Reconstruction is a decoded picture (and corresponding reference blocks and samples) and/or a partially reconstructed current picture (and corresponding reference blocks and samples), for example, for inter prediction.
  • a decoded picture buffer (DPB) 230 is used to store the reconstructed block 215.
  • the prediction processing unit 260 also called the block prediction processing unit 260, is used to receive or obtain the image block 203 (the current image block 203 of the current picture 201) and reconstructed picture data, such as the same (current) picture from the buffer 216
  • the reference samples and/or the reference picture data 231 of one or more previously decoded pictures from the decoded picture buffer 230, and used to process such data for prediction, that is, the provision can be an inter-predicted block 245 or a The prediction block 265 of the intra prediction block 255.
  • the mode selection unit 262 may be used to select a prediction mode (for example, intra or inter prediction mode) and/or the corresponding prediction block 245 or 255 used as the prediction block 265 to calculate the residual block 205 and reconstruct the reconstructed block 215.
  • a prediction mode for example, intra or inter prediction mode
  • the corresponding prediction block 245 or 255 used as the prediction block 265 to calculate the residual block 205 and reconstruct the reconstructed block 215.
  • the embodiment of the mode selection unit 262 can be used to select a prediction mode (for example, from those supported by the prediction processing unit 260) that provides the best match or minimum residual (the minimum residual means Better compression in transmission or storage), or provide minimal signaling overhead (minimum signaling overhead means better compression in transmission or storage), or consider or balance both.
  • the mode selection unit 262 may be configured to determine a prediction mode based on rate distortion optimization (RDO), that is, select a prediction mode that provides the smallest rate-distortion optimization, or select a prediction mode whose related rate-distortion at least meets the prediction mode selection criteria .
  • RDO rate distortion optimization
  • the encoder 20 is used to determine or select the best or optimal prediction mode from a set of (predetermined) prediction modes.
  • the prediction mode set may include, for example, an intra prediction mode and/or an inter prediction mode.
  • the set of intra prediction modes may include 35 different intra prediction modes, for example, non-directional modes such as DC (or mean) mode and planar mode, or directional modes as defined in H.265, or may include 67 Different intra-frame prediction modes, for example, non-directional modes such as DC (or mean) mode and planar mode, or directional modes as defined in H.266 under development.
  • the set of inter-frame prediction modes depends on the available reference pictures (ie, for example, the aforementioned at least part of the decoded pictures stored in the DBP230) and other inter-frame prediction parameters, such as whether to use the entire reference picture or only use A part of the reference picture, such as the search window area surrounding the area of the current block, to search for the best matching reference block, and/or depending on whether pixel interpolation such as half pixel and/or quarter pixel interpolation is applied.
  • the set of inter prediction modes may include, for example, an advanced motion vector (Advanced Motion Vector Prediction, AMVP) mode and a merge mode.
  • AMVP Advanced Motion Vector Prediction
  • the inter-frame prediction mode set may include an improved AMVP mode based on a control point in the embodiment of the present invention, and an improved merge mode based on a control point.
  • the intra prediction unit 254 may be used to perform any combination of inter prediction techniques described below.
  • the embodiment of the present invention may also apply skip mode and/or direct mode.
  • the prediction processing unit 260 may be further used to divide the image block 203 into smaller block partitions or sub-blocks, for example, by iteratively using quad-tree (QT) segmentation and binary-tree (BT) segmentation. Or triple-tree (TT) segmentation, or any combination thereof, and used to perform prediction, for example, for each of the block partitions or sub-blocks, where the mode selection includes selecting the tree structure of the segmented image block 203 and selecting the application The prediction mode for each of the block partitions or sub-blocks.
  • QT quad-tree
  • BT binary-tree
  • TT triple-tree
  • the inter prediction unit 244 may include a motion estimation (ME) unit (not shown in FIG. 2) and a motion compensation (MC) unit (not shown in FIG. 2).
  • the motion estimation unit is used to receive or obtain the picture image block 203 (the current picture image block 203 of the current picture 201) and the decoded picture 231, or at least one or more previously reconstructed blocks, for example, one or more other/different
  • the reconstructed block of the previously decoded picture 231 is used for motion estimation.
  • the video sequence may include the current picture and the previously decoded picture 31, or in other words, the current picture and the previously decoded picture 31 may be part of the picture sequence forming the video sequence, or form the picture sequence.
  • the encoder 20 may be used to select a reference block from multiple reference blocks of the same or different pictures among multiple other pictures, and provide the reference picture and/or provide a reference to the motion estimation unit (not shown in FIG. 2)
  • the offset (spatial offset) between the position of the block (X, Y coordinates) and the position of the current block is used as an inter prediction parameter. This offset is also called a motion vector (MV).
  • the motion compensation unit is used to obtain inter prediction parameters, and perform inter prediction based on or using the inter prediction parameters to obtain the inter prediction block 245.
  • the motion compensation performed by the motion compensation unit may include fetching or generating a prediction block based on a motion/block vector determined by motion estimation (interpolation of sub-pixel accuracy may be performed). Interpolation filtering can generate additional pixel samples from known pixel samples, thereby potentially increasing the number of candidate prediction blocks that can be used to encode picture blocks.
  • the motion compensation unit 246 can locate the prediction block pointed to by the motion vector in a reference picture list.
  • the motion compensation unit 246 may also generate syntax elements associated with the blocks and video slices for use by the decoder 30 when decoding picture blocks of the video slices.
  • the aforementioned inter-prediction unit 244 may transmit syntax elements to the entropy encoding unit 270, and the syntax elements include inter-prediction parameters (for example, after traversing multiple inter-prediction modes and selecting the inter-prediction mode used for prediction of the current block) Instructions).
  • the inter-frame prediction parameter may not be carried in the syntax element.
  • the decoder 30 can directly use the default prediction mode for decoding. It can be understood that the inter prediction unit 244 may be used to perform any combination of inter prediction techniques.
  • the intra prediction unit 254 is used to obtain, for example, receive a picture block 203 (current picture block) of the same picture and one or more previously reconstructed blocks, for example reconstructed adjacent blocks, for intra estimation.
  • the encoder 20 may be used to select an intra prediction mode from a plurality of (predetermined) intra prediction modes.
  • the embodiment of the encoder 20 may be used to select an intra prediction mode based on optimization criteria, for example, based on a minimum residual (for example, an intra prediction mode that provides a prediction block 255 most similar to the current picture block 203) or a minimum rate distortion.
  • a minimum residual for example, an intra prediction mode that provides a prediction block 255 most similar to the current picture block 203
  • a minimum rate distortion for example, an intra prediction mode that provides a prediction block 255 most similar to the current picture block 203
  • the intra prediction unit 254 is further configured to determine the intra prediction block 255 based on the intra prediction parameters of the selected intra prediction mode. In any case, after selecting the intra prediction mode for the block, the intra prediction unit 254 is also used to provide intra prediction parameters to the entropy encoding unit 270, that is, to provide an indication of the selected intra prediction mode for the block Information. In one example, the intra prediction unit 254 may be used to perform any combination of intra prediction techniques.
  • the aforementioned intra-prediction unit 254 may transmit syntax elements to the entropy encoding unit 270, and the syntax elements include intra-prediction parameters (for example, after traversing multiple intra-prediction modes, selecting the intra-prediction mode used for prediction of the current block) Instructions).
  • the intra prediction parameter may not be carried in the syntax element.
  • the decoder 30 can directly use the default prediction mode for decoding.
  • the entropy coding unit 270 is used to apply entropy coding algorithms or schemes (for example, variable length coding (VLC) scheme, context adaptive VLC (context adaptive VLC, CAVLC) scheme, arithmetic coding scheme, context adaptive binary arithmetic) Coding (context adaptive binary arithmetic coding, CABAC), syntax-based context-adaptive binary arithmetic coding (SBAC), probability interval partitioning entropy (PIPE) coding or other entropy Encoding method or technique) applied to quantized residual coefficients 209, inter-frame prediction parameters, intra-frame prediction parameters and/or loop filter parameters, one or all (or not applied), to obtain the output 272
  • VLC variable length coding
  • CAVLC context adaptive VLC
  • CABAC context adaptive binary arithmetic
  • SBAC syntax-based context-adaptive binary arithmetic coding
  • PIPE probability interval partitioning entropy
  • encoded picture data 21 output in the form of encoded bitstream
  • the encoded bitstream can be transmitted to the video decoder 30, or archived for later transmission or retrieval by the video decoder 30.
  • the entropy encoding unit 270 may also be used for entropy encoding other syntax elements of the current video slice being encoded.
  • the non-transform-based encoder 20 may directly quantize the residual signal without the transform processing unit 206 for certain blocks or frames.
  • the encoder 20 may have a quantization unit 208 and an inverse quantization unit 210 combined into a single unit.
  • the encoder 20 may be used to implement the motion vector prediction method described in the following embodiments.
  • the video encoder 20 may directly quantize the residual signal without being processed by the transform processing unit 206, and accordingly does not need to be processed by the inverse transform processing unit 212; or, for some For image blocks or image frames, the video encoder 20 does not generate residual data, and accordingly does not need to be processed by the transform processing unit 206, quantization unit 208, inverse quantization unit 210, and inverse transform processing unit 212; or, the video encoder 20 may The reconstructed image block is directly stored as a reference block without being processed by the filter 220; or, the quantization unit 208 and the inverse quantization unit 210 in the video encoder 20 may be combined together.
  • the loop filter 220 is optional, and for lossless compression coding, the transform processing unit 206, the quantization unit 208, the inverse quantization unit 210, and the inverse transform processing unit 212 are optional. It should be understood that, according to different application scenarios, the inter prediction unit 244 and the intra prediction unit 254 may be selectively activated.
  • Fig. 3 shows a schematic/conceptual block diagram of an example of a decoder 30 for implementing an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the video decoder 30 is used to receive, for example, encoded picture data (for example, an encoded bit stream) 21 encoded by the encoder 20 to obtain a decoded picture 231.
  • video decoder 30 receives video data from video encoder 20, such as an encoded video bitstream and associated syntax elements that represent picture blocks of an encoded video slice.
  • the decoder 30 includes an entropy decoding unit 304, an inverse quantization unit 310, an inverse transform processing unit 312, a reconstruction unit 314 (such as a summer 314), a buffer 316, a loop filter 320, and The decoded picture buffer 330 and the prediction processing unit 360.
  • the prediction processing unit 360 may include an inter prediction unit 344, an intra prediction unit 354, and a mode selection unit 362.
  • video decoder 30 may perform a decoding process that is substantially reciprocal of the encoding process described with video encoder 20 of FIG. 2.
  • the entropy decoding unit 304 is configured to perform entropy decoding on the encoded picture data 21 to obtain, for example, quantized coefficients 309 and/or decoded encoding parameters (not shown in FIG. 3), for example, inter prediction, intra prediction parameters , Loop filter parameters and/or any one or all of other syntax elements (decoded).
  • the entropy decoding unit 304 is further configured to forward the inter prediction parameters, intra prediction parameters and/or other syntax elements to the prediction processing unit 360.
  • the video decoder 30 may receive syntax elements at the video slice level and/or the video block level.
  • the inverse quantization unit 310 can be functionally the same as the inverse quantization unit 110
  • the inverse transformation processing unit 312 can be functionally the same as the inverse transformation processing unit 212
  • the reconstruction unit 314 can be functionally the same as the reconstruction unit 214
  • the buffer 316 can be functionally identical.
  • the loop filter 320 may be functionally the same as the loop filter 220
  • the decoded picture buffer 330 may be functionally the same as the decoded picture buffer 230.
  • the prediction processing unit 360 may include an inter prediction unit 344 and an intra prediction unit 354.
  • the inter prediction unit 344 may be functionally similar to the inter prediction unit 244, and the intra prediction unit 354 may be functionally similar to the intra prediction unit 254.
  • the prediction processing unit 360 is generally used to perform block prediction and/or obtain a prediction block 365 from the encoded data 21, and to receive or obtain (explicitly or implicitly) prediction-related parameters and/or information about the prediction from the entropy decoding unit 304, for example. Information about the selected prediction mode.
  • the intra-prediction unit 354 of the prediction processing unit 360 is used for the intra-prediction mode based on the signal and the previous decoded block from the current frame or picture. Data to generate a prediction block 365 for the picture block of the current video slice.
  • the inter-frame prediction unit 344 eg, motion compensation unit
  • the prediction processing unit 360 is used for the motion vector and the received from the entropy decoding unit 304
  • the other syntax elements generate a prediction block 365 for the video block of the current video slice.
  • a prediction block can be generated from a reference picture in a reference picture list.
  • the video decoder 30 may use the default construction technique to construct a list of reference frames based on the reference pictures stored in the DPB 330: list 0 and list 1.
  • the prediction processing unit 360 is configured to determine prediction information for the video block of the current video slice by parsing the motion vector and other syntax elements, and use the prediction information to generate the prediction block for the current video block being decoded.
  • the prediction processing unit 360 uses some of the received syntax elements to determine the prediction mode (for example, intra or inter prediction) and the inter prediction slice type ( For example, B slice, P slice or GPB slice), construction information for one or more of the reference picture list for the slice, motion vector for each inter-coded video block of the slice, The inter prediction status and other information of each inter-encoded video block of the slice to decode the video block of the current video slice.
  • the syntax elements received by the video decoder 30 from the bitstream include receiving adaptive parameter set (APS), sequence parameter set (sequence parameter set, SPS), and picture parameter set (picture parameter set). parameter set, PPS) or a syntax element in one or more of the slice headers.
  • APS adaptive parameter set
  • SPS sequence parameter set
  • PPS picture parameter set
  • the inverse quantization unit 310 may be used to inverse quantize (ie, inverse quantize) the quantized transform coefficients provided in the bitstream and decoded by the entropy decoding unit 304.
  • the inverse quantization process may include using the quantization parameter calculated by the video encoder 20 for each video block in the video slice to determine the degree of quantization that should be applied and also determine the degree of inverse quantization that should be applied.
  • the inverse transform processing unit 312 is used to apply an inverse transform (for example, an inverse DCT, an inverse integer transform, or a conceptually similar inverse transform process) to transform coefficients so as to generate a residual block in the pixel domain.
  • an inverse transform for example, an inverse DCT, an inverse integer transform, or a conceptually similar inverse transform process
  • the reconstruction unit 314 (for example, the summer 314) is used to add the inverse transform block 313 (that is, the reconstructed residual block 313) to the prediction block 365 to obtain the reconstructed block 315 in the sample domain, for example by adding The sample value of the reconstructed residual block 313 and the sample value of the prediction block 365 are added.
  • the loop filter unit 320 (during the encoding cycle or after the encoding cycle) is used to filter the reconstructed block 315 to obtain the filtered block 321, thereby smoothly performing pixel conversion or improving video quality.
  • the loop filter unit 320 may be used to perform any combination of the filtering techniques described below.
  • the loop filter unit 320 is intended to represent one or more loop filters, such as deblocking filters, sample-adaptive offset (SAO) filters or other filters, such as bilateral filters, auto Adaptive loop filter (ALF), or sharpening or smoothing filter, or collaborative filter.
  • the loop filter unit 320 is shown as an in-loop filter in FIG. 3, in other configurations, the loop filter unit 320 may be implemented as a post-loop filter.
  • the decoded video block 321 in a given frame or picture is then stored in a decoded picture buffer 330 that stores reference pictures for subsequent motion compensation.
  • the decoder 30 is used, for example, to output the decoded picture 31 through the output 332 for presentation or viewing by the user.
  • the decoder 30 may generate an output video stream without the loop filter unit 320.
  • the non-transform-based decoder 30 may directly inversely quantize the residual signal without the inverse transform processing unit 312 for certain blocks or frames.
  • the video decoder 30 may have an inverse quantization unit 310 and an inverse transform processing unit 312 combined into a single unit.
  • the decoder 30 is used to implement the motion vector prediction method described in the following embodiments.
  • the video decoder 30 may generate an output video stream without processing by the filter 320; or, for some image blocks or image frames, the entropy decoding unit 304 of the video decoder 30 does not decode the quantized coefficients, and accordingly does not It needs to be processed by the inverse quantization unit 310 and the inverse transform processing unit 312.
  • the loop filter 320 is optional; and for lossless compression, the inverse quantization unit 310 and the inverse transform processing unit 312 are optional.
  • the inter prediction unit and the intra prediction unit may be selectively activated.
  • the processing result for a certain link can be further processed and output to the next link, for example, in interpolation filtering, motion vector derivation or loop filtering, etc.
  • operations such as Clip or shift are further performed on the processing results of the corresponding link.
  • the motion vector of the control point of the current image block derived from the motion vector of the adjacent affine coding block, or the motion vector of the sub-block of the current image block derived from the motion vector may undergo further processing, and this application will not do this limited.
  • restrict the value range of the motion vector so that it is within a certain bit width. Assuming that the bit width of the allowed motion vector is bitDepth, the range of the motion vector is -2 ⁇ (bitDepth-1) ⁇ 2 ⁇ (bitDepth-1)-1, where the " ⁇ " symbol represents the power. If bitDepth is 16, the value range is -32768 ⁇ 32767. If bitDepth is 18, the value range is -131072 ⁇ 131071.
  • the value of the motion vector (for example, the motion vector MV of the four 4x4 sub-blocks in an 8x8 image block) is restricted, so that the maximum difference between the integer parts of the four 4x4 sub-blocks MV does not exceed N pixels, for example, no more than one pixel.
  • ux (vx+2 bitDepth )%2 bitDepth
  • vx is the horizontal component of the motion vector of the image block or the sub-block of the image block
  • vy is the vertical component of the motion vector of the image block or the sub-block of the image block
  • ux and uy are intermediate values
  • bitDepth represents bit width
  • the value of vx is -32769, and the value obtained by the above formula is 32767. Because in the computer, the value is stored in the form of two's complement, the two's complement of -32769 is 1,0111,1111,1111,1111 (17 bits), and the computer treats overflow as discarding the high bits, then the value of vx If it is 0111,1111,1111,1111, it is 32767, which is consistent with the result obtained by formula processing.
  • vx Clip3(-2 bitDepth-1 ,2 bitDepth-1 -1,vx)
  • vx is the horizontal component of the motion vector of the image block or the sub-block of the image block
  • vy is the vertical component of the motion vector of the image block or the sub-block of the image block
  • x, y, and z correspond to MV clamps, respectively
  • the definition of Clip3 is to clamp the value of z to the interval [x, y]:
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic structural diagram of a video decoding device 400 (for example, a video encoding device 400 or a video decoding device 400) provided by an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the video coding device 400 is suitable for implementing the embodiments described herein.
  • the video coding device 400 may be a video decoder (for example, the decoder 30 of FIG. 1A) or a video encoder (for example, the encoder 20 of FIG. 1A).
  • the video coding device 400 may be one or more components of the decoder 30 in FIG. 1A or the encoder 20 in FIG. 1A described above.
  • the video decoding device 400 includes: an entry port 410 for receiving data and a receiving unit (Rx) 420, a processor, logic unit or central processing unit (CPU) 430 for processing data, and a transmitter unit for transmitting data (Tx) 440 and outlet port 450, and a memory 460 for storing data.
  • the video decoding device 400 may further include a photoelectric conversion component and an electro-optical (EO) component coupled with the inlet port 410, the receiver unit 420, the transmitter unit 440, and the outlet port 450 for the outlet or inlet of optical signals or electrical signals.
  • EO electro-optical
  • the processor 430 is implemented by hardware and software.
  • the processor 430 may be implemented as one or more CPU chips, cores (for example, multi-core processors), FPGA, ASIC, and DSP.
  • the processor 430 communicates with the ingress port 410, the receiver unit 420, the transmitter unit 440, the egress port 450, and the memory 460.
  • the processor 430 includes a decoding module 470 (for example, an encoding module 470 or a decoding module 470).
  • the encoding/decoding module 470 implements the embodiments disclosed herein to implement the chroma block prediction method provided by the embodiments of the present invention. For example, the encoding/decoding module 470 implements, processes, or provides various encoding operations.
  • the encoding/decoding module 470 provides a substantial improvement to the function of the video decoding device 400 and affects the conversion of the video decoding device 400 to different states.
  • the encoding/decoding module 470 is implemented by instructions stored in the memory 460 and executed by the processor 430.
  • the memory 460 includes one or more magnetic disks, tape drives, and solid-state hard disks, and can be used as an overflow data storage device for storing programs when these programs are selectively executed, and storing instructions and data read during program execution.
  • the memory 460 may be volatile and/or non-volatile, and may be read-only memory (ROM), random access memory (RAM), random access memory (ternary content-addressable memory, TCAM), and/or static Random Access Memory (SRAM).
  • FIG. 5 is a simplified block diagram of an apparatus 500 that can be used as either or both of the source device 12 and the destination device 14 in FIG. 1A according to an exemplary embodiment.
  • the device 500 can implement the technology of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic block diagram of an implementation manner of an encoding device or a decoding device (referred to as a decoding device 500 for short) according to an embodiment of the application.
  • the decoding device 500 may include a processor 510, a memory 530, and a bus system 550.
  • the processor and the memory are connected through a bus system, the memory is used to store instructions, and the processor is used to execute instructions stored in the memory.
  • the memory of the decoding device stores program codes, and the processor can call the program codes stored in the memory to execute various video encoding or decoding methods described in this application, especially various new inter-frame prediction methods. To avoid repetition, it will not be described in detail here.
  • the processor 510 may be a central processing unit (Central Processing Unit, referred to as "CPU"), and the processor 510 may also be other general-purpose processors, digital signal processors (DSP), and dedicated integrated Circuit (ASIC), off-the-shelf programmable gate array (FPGA) or other programmable logic devices, discrete gates or transistor logic devices, discrete hardware components, etc.
  • the general-purpose processor may be a microprocessor or the processor may also be any conventional processor or the like.
  • the memory 530 may include a read only memory (ROM) device or a random access memory (RAM) device. Any other suitable type of storage device can also be used as the memory 530.
  • the memory 530 may include code and data 531 accessed by the processor 510 using the bus 550.
  • the memory 530 may further include an operating system 533 and an application program 535.
  • the application program 535 includes at least one program that allows the processor 510 to execute the video encoding or decoding method described in this application (especially the motion vector prediction method described in this application).
  • the application program 535 may include applications 1 to N, which further include a video encoding or decoding application (referred to as a video coding application) that executes the video encoding or decoding method described in this application.
  • the bus system 550 may also include a power bus, a control bus, and a status signal bus. However, for clear description, various buses are marked as the bus system 550 in the figure.
  • the decoding device 500 may further include one or more output devices, such as a display 570.
  • the display 570 may be a touch-sensitive display that merges the display with a touch-sensitive unit operable to sense touch input.
  • the display 570 may be connected to the processor 510 via the bus 550.
  • FIG. 4 and FIG. 5 may be used to execute the method in the embodiment of the present application.
  • inter-frame prediction is an important part of the video codec system.
  • HEVC introduces two inter-frame prediction modes, namely Advanced Motion Vector Prediction (AMVP) mode and Merge mode.
  • AMVP Advanced Motion Vector Prediction
  • Merge mode Merge mode
  • For the AMVP mode first construct a candidate motion vector list based on the motion information of the adjacent coded units in the spatial or temporal domain of the current coding unit, and then determine the optimal motion vector from the candidate motion vector list as the motion vector prediction of the current coding unit Value (Motion vector predictor, MVP).
  • MVP Motion vector predictor
  • the rate-distortion cost is calculated by formula (1), where J is the rate-distortion cost (RD Cost), and SAD is the sum of absolute errors between the predicted pixel value and the original pixel value obtained after motion estimation using candidate motion vector predictors ( Sum of Absolute Differences, SAD), R is the code rate, ⁇ is the Lagrangian multiplier, and the encoder transmits the index value of the motion vector predictor selected based on the rate-distortion cost in the candidate motion vector list and the reference frame index value To the decoding end.
  • RD Cost rate-distortion cost
  • SAD Sum of Absolute Differences
  • a motion search is performed in a neighborhood centered on the MVP to obtain the actual motion vector of the current coding unit, and the encoding end transmits the difference (Motion vector difference, MVD) between the MVP and the actual motion vector to the decoding end.
  • MVD Motion vector difference
  • the current coding unit spatial and temporal candidate motion information is shown in Figure 6.
  • the spatial candidate motion information comes from 5 adjacent blocks (A0, A1, B0, B1 and B2) in space. If the adjacent blocks are not available or are frames In intra coding mode or intra block copy mode, the candidate motion information list is not added.
  • the temporal candidate motion information of the current coding unit is obtained after scaling the MV of the corresponding block in the reference frame according to the picture order count (POC) of the reference frame and the current frame.
  • the determination of the corresponding position block includes first determining whether the block with position T in the reference frame is available, and if it is not available, selecting the block with position C as the corresponding position block.
  • motion compensation is performed based on the assumption that the motion information of all pixels in the coding unit is the same to obtain the predicted value of the pixels of the coding unit.
  • a coding unit not all pixels necessarily have the same motion characteristics. Therefore, using the same motion information to predict all pixels in the CU may reduce the accuracy of motion compensation, thereby increasing residual information.
  • the coding unit is divided into at least two sub-coding units, and then the motion information of each sub-coding unit is derived, and motion compensation is performed according to the motion information of the sub-coding unit, thereby improving The accuracy of prediction, for example, sub-coding unit motion vector prediction (Sub-CU based motion vector prediction, SMVP) technology.
  • sub-coding unit motion vector prediction Sub-CU based motion vector prediction, SMVP
  • SMVP divides the current coding unit into MxN sub-coding units, and derives the motion information of each sub-coding unit, and then uses the motion information of each sub-coding unit to perform motion compensation to obtain the predicted value of the current coding unit.
  • candidate motion information list is also called a sub-block based merging candidate list (sub-block based merging candidate list).
  • the sub-block fusion candidate list includes ATMVP prediction mode, affine model-based prediction mode (including the use of inherited control point motion vector prediction methods and/or the use of constructed control point motion vector prediction methods) , Based on one or more of the inter-plane prediction modes (PLANAR).
  • ATMVP prediction mode including the use of inherited control point motion vector prediction methods and/or the use of constructed control point motion vector prediction methods
  • affine model-based prediction mode including the use of inherited control point motion vector prediction methods and/or the use of constructed control point motion vector prediction methods
  • PLANAR inter-plane prediction modes
  • the ATMVP technology first determines the corresponding position reference frame (Collocated reference picture), then divides the current coding unit into MxN sub-coding units, and obtains the corresponding sub-coding of each current sub-coding unit in the corresponding position reference frame The motion information of the pixel at the center point of the unit is scaled and converted into the current motion information of each sub-coding unit.
  • ATMVP is also called subblock-based temporal motion vector prediction (SbTMVP) ).
  • the STMVP technology obtains the motion information of adjacent positions in the upper spatial domain, left spatial domain, and lower right time domain of each sub-coding unit, finds the average value, and converts it into the current motion information of each sub-coding unit.
  • the current coding unit is divided into four sub coding units A, B, C, and D.
  • the motion information of the sub coding unit A is derived from the motion information of the adjacent positions c and b in the spatial domain and the position D in the corresponding position reference frame.
  • the filled motion information can be 0 or other motion information agreed in advance, which is not limited .
  • the process of using ATMVP technology to perform inter-frame prediction on the current to-be-processed image mainly includes: determining the offset motion vector of the current to-be-processed block in the current to-be-processed image; according to the position of the to-be-processed sub-block in the current to-be-processed block and the above offset Shift the motion vector, determine the corresponding sub-block of the sub-block to be processed in the corresponding reference image; determine the motion vector of the current sub-block to be processed according to the motion vector of the corresponding sub-block; determine the motion vector of the current sub-block to be processed according to the motion vector of the sub-block to be processed Perform motion compensation prediction to obtain the predicted pixel value of the sub-block to be processed.
  • FIG. 9 in a feasible implementation manner, it includes:
  • the offset motion vector is used to determine the correspondence of the preset location point in the current CU (that is, the current CU to be processed, or can also be called the block to be processed, the block to be coded, the block to be decoded, etc.) in the collocated picture The location of the point.
  • the offset motion vector may use the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block of the current CU.
  • the corresponding image of the frame where the current CU is located can be obtained by parsing the code stream, or can be a preset value (the preset value has the same value on the codec side). Exemplarily, let us set the corresponding image as an image with a reference frame index of 0 in the reference frame list of the current CU.
  • the position of the current CU in the corresponding image block may also be determined according to the offset motion vector and the corresponding image block, and the block at this position may be referred to as a corresponding/collocated block (corresponding/collocated block).
  • the offset motion vector can be obtained by any of the following methods.
  • Method 1 Determine whether the motion vector of A1 in Figure 6 is available. It should be understood that “available” refers to the existence and availability of the motion vector. Exemplarily, when the adjacent block does not exist, or the adjacent block and the current block are not in the same coding area (such as slice, slice ( tile), tile group (tile group), etc.), or if the adjacent block adopts intra prediction mode or intra block copy mode (intra block copy, IBC), the motion vector of the adjacent block is not available. On the contrary, if the adjacent block adopts the inter prediction mode, or the adjacent block adopts the inter prediction mode and is in the same coding area as the current block, the motion vector of the adjacent block is available.
  • intra prediction mode intra block copy
  • IBC intra block copy
  • the IBC mode is a block-level coding mode. At the coding end, a block matching method is used to find the best block vector or motion vector for each CU.
  • the motion vector here is mainly used to represent the displacement from the current block to the reference block, which is also called a displacement vector.
  • the reference block is a reconstructed block in the current image.
  • the IBC mode can be considered as the third prediction mode in addition to the intra prediction or inter prediction mode. In order to save storage space and reduce the complexity of the decoder, the IBC mode in some embodiments only allows the reconstruction part of the predefined area of the current CTU to be used for prediction.
  • the zero motion vector can be used as the offset motion vector of the current CU.
  • A1 may have a first-directional motion vector based on the first reference frame list list0 and a second-directional motion vector based on the second reference frame list list1.
  • the second-direction motion vector of A1 based on list1 is used as the offset motion vector of the current CU.
  • the conditions include:
  • A1 uses the reference frame in list1 for prediction
  • the reference frame in list1 of A1 used for prediction is the same as the corresponding image of the image frame where the current CU is located;
  • the POC of the reference frame in list1 and the POC of the corresponding image of the image frame where the current CU is located are the same, wherein the information characterizing the corresponding image can be obtained by analyzing the code stream.
  • the image type of the image where the current CU is located is a B image, or the slice where the current CU is located is a B slice, or the tile group where the current CU is located is a B slice group;
  • Conditions include:
  • A1 uses the reference frame in list0 for prediction
  • the reference frame in the list0 of A1 used for prediction is the same as the corresponding image of the image frame where the current CU is located.
  • Method 2 According to the order of A1, B1, B0, A0 in Figure 6, find the first available motion vector of the adjacent block. If the reference frame of the adjacent block is the corresponding image of the frame where the current CU is located, that is, the found motion vector points to the corresponding image, then the motion vector of the adjacent block is used as the offset motion vector of the current CU. Otherwise, that is, if the reference frame of the neighboring block is not the corresponding image of the frame where the current CU is located, in a feasible implementation manner, the zero motion vector can be used as the offset motion vector of the current CU.
  • the motion vector of the first available neighboring block is based on the POC of the corresponding image, the POC of the image where the current CU is located, and the reference frame of the first available neighboring block POC, zoom, make the zoomed motion vector point to the corresponding image, and use the zoomed motion vector as the offset motion vector of the current CU.
  • zoom refer to the method for obtaining a time-domain motion vector in the prior art, or the scaling method in step 1005 in this embodiment, and will not be repeated.
  • the image block in the corresponding image at the same position as the current CU is the corresponding block of the current CU in the corresponding image.
  • the ATMVP prediction mode is not used to obtain the motion vector of the sub-block of the current CU.
  • S902 Determine whether the ATMVP mode is available according to the offset motion vector.
  • the image block where the corresponding point of the current CU preset position point in the corresponding image is located is the S sub-block, and its coordinate position is (x col , y col ), for example,
  • (x, y) is the coordinates of the upper left vertex of the current CU
  • W is the width of the current CU
  • H is the height of the current CU
  • (x off , y off ) is the offset motion vector.
  • step 902 and subsequent steps are stopped.
  • the prediction mode of the S sub-block is the inter-frame prediction mode
  • the motion information of the S sub-block is determined as the initial default Motion vector.
  • the initial default motion vector MV is scaled to obtain the default motion vector MVs of the sub-block to be processed.
  • MVs can be obtained by formula (3):
  • CurPoc is the POC of the frame where the current CU is located
  • ColPoc is the POC of the corresponding image
  • CurRefPoc is the POC of the reference frame of the current CU
  • ColRefPoc is the POC of the reference frame of the sub-block S.
  • MV includes a horizontal motion vector MVx and a vertical motion vector MVy, which can be calculated according to the above formulas to obtain the scaled horizontal motion vector MVsx and the scaled vertical motion vector MVsy, respectively.
  • S903 Determine the motion information of the sub-block to be processed according to the motion information of the corresponding sub-block.
  • the block to be processed that is, the current CU, is located in the current image.
  • the block to be processed contains 4 sub-blocks, and one sub-block to be processed is the upper left sub-block of the block to be processed.
  • the sub-block at the upper left position in the corresponding image may be determined as the corresponding sub-block of the sub-block to be processed. It should be understood that different corresponding sub-blocks may exist in the form of corresponding blocks as a whole, or may exist in the form of separate sub-blocks.
  • the motion information corresponding to the position of the geometric center of the corresponding sub-block can be obtained.
  • the center position (x (i, j) of the corresponding sub-block of the (i, j)-th to-be-processed sub-block of the current CU that is, the i-th from left to right and the j-th from top to bottom )
  • y (i,j) ) can be obtained according to formula (4)
  • (x, y) represents the coordinates of the upper left vertex of the current CU
  • M represents the width of the sub-block to be processed
  • H represents the height of the sub-block to be processed.
  • the motion vector at the center position is available, and the motion vector at this position is obtained. Based on the temporal relationship between the image frame where the sub-block to be processed is located and the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is located, the motion vector is scaled to obtain the motion vector of the sub-block to be processed.
  • the zoom processing method is similar to formula (2), which is exemplary,
  • MV is the motion vector at the aforementioned center position
  • MV R is the motion vector of the sub-block to be processed.
  • the POC CurRefPoc of the reference frame of the current CU may be preset to the POC of the reference frame whose reference frame index is 0 in the reference image list of the frame where the current CU is located.
  • CurRefPoc may also be other reference frames in the reference image list of the frame where the current CU is located, and is not limited.
  • the motion vector at the center position is not available, and the default motion vector MVs of the sub-block to be processed determined in step S902 is used as the sub-block to be processed.
  • the motion vector of the block is the motion vector of the block.
  • S904 Perform motion compensation based on the motion information of the sub-block of the current CU to obtain the predicted pixel value of the current CU.
  • each sub-block For each sub-block, perform motion compensation based on the motion vector determined in step 903 and the reference frame of the image where the current CU is located, for example, the motion vector MV R and the reference frame CurRefPoc, to obtain the predicted pixel value of the sub-block.
  • the process of motion compensation can refer to the foregoing description, or any improvement scheme in the prior art, and will not be repeated.
  • the predicted pixel value of the current CU is also obtained.
  • the motion vector of each sub-block by obtaining the motion vector of each sub-block, it can reflect the more complex motion conditions within the block to be processed, improve the accuracy of the motion vector, and thereby improve the coding efficiency.
  • the motion information of the corresponding sub-block is not available , Need to calculate the default motion information, which affects the encoding and decoding speed.
  • the to-be-processed block includes one or more sub-blocks, and the identification information of the corresponding image of the to-be-processed block is parsed and obtained from the code stream.
  • the motion vector of a spatial neighboring block at the preset position of the block to be processed is available and the reference frame corresponding to the motion vector is the corresponding image
  • the motion vector is determined as the time-domain offset vector.
  • the position of the corresponding sub-block of the sub-block of the block to be processed is determined in the corresponding image based on the time-domain offset vector. Determine whether the motion vector of the corresponding sub-block is available, and determine the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed based on the motion vector of the corresponding sub-block.
  • the inter-frame prediction method is specifically:
  • the time domain offset vector is used to determine the corresponding sub-block of the sub-block of the block to be processed.
  • the block to be processed includes 4 sub-blocks to be processed, and the sub-block of each block to be processed is based on its position in the current image and the time domain offset vector (identified in the figure). Is the offset motion vector), and the corresponding sub-block is determined in the corresponding image (denoted as the target image in the figure, that is, the image where the corresponding sub-block is located).
  • the index of the image frame (corresponding image) where the corresponding sub-block is located in the reference frame list of the spatial neighboring block of the block to be processed is obtained by parsing the code stream, that is, the decoding end can be obtained by parsing the corresponding code stream in the code stream.
  • the information determines the corresponding image.
  • the image frame with the best performance can be determined as the corresponding image through the RDO selection method, or a certain frame is designated as the corresponding image, and the instruction information of the corresponding image is written into the code stream.
  • the corresponding image can also be set according to the pre-protocol of the codec.
  • step 1201 may specifically be:
  • the motion vector of the neighboring block in the spatial domain that is available for the first motion vector in the preset sequence is used as the time domain offset vector.
  • the second preset motion vector is used as the time domain offset vector.
  • the spatial neighboring blocks A1, B1, B0, A0 of the block to be processed can be checked in turn whether their motion vectors are available, until the spatial neighboring blocks available for the first motion vector are found.
  • B0 stop checking
  • B0 the motion vector of B0 as the time-domain offset vector.
  • the motion vector of B0 can be scaled to make the scale
  • the subsequent motion vector uses the corresponding image as the reference frame.
  • the second preset motion vector may be set as a zero motion vector as the time-domain offset vector.
  • the spatial neighboring block at the first preset position is pre-configured by the codec end or determined according to higher-level syntax elements, which is not limited in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the condition that the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block is unavailable includes one or a combination of the following: the spatial neighboring block is not encoded/decoded (if the prediction method is implemented on the encoding side, the spatial neighboring block is not encoded, if When implemented at the decoding end, the spatial neighboring block is not decoded); or, the spatial neighboring block adopts intra prediction or intra block copy mode; or, the spatial neighboring block does not exist; or, the spatial neighboring block
  • the spatial neighboring block and the block to be processed are located in different coding regions.
  • the coding area includes: an image, a slice, a tile, or a tile group.
  • step 1201 may also specifically be:
  • the third preset motion vector is used as the time domain offset vector.
  • the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position also satisfies that its reference frame is the same as the image in which the corresponding image is located.
  • the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position includes a first-directional motion vector based on the first reference frame list
  • the reference frame of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position includes The first direction reference frame corresponding to the first direction motion vector.
  • the use of the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position as the time domain offset vector is specifically: when the first direction reference frame and the When the image frames where the corresponding sub-blocks are located are the same, the first motion vector is used as the time domain offset vector.
  • the first-direction reference frame and the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is located are different, use the third preset motion vector as the time-domain offset vector.
  • the third preset motion vector is a zero motion vector.
  • the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position also includes the second direction based on the second reference frame list.
  • the use of the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position as the time domain offset vector is specifically: when the first direction reference frame and the When the image frames in which the corresponding sub-blocks are located are the same, use the first motion vector as the time-domain offset vector.
  • the method further includes: judging whether the coding region of the spatial neighboring block is of type B, that is, whether it is a B frame , B film, B strip or B film group, etc.
  • the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position is used as the time
  • the domain offset vector is specifically: when the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located is obtained from the second reference frame list, determine whether the second-direction reference frame and the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located are the same When the second-direction reference frame and the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located are the same, use the second-direction motion vector as the time-domain offset vector; when the second-direction reference frame and the When the corresponding sub-blocks are in different image frames and the first-direction reference frame and the corresponding sub-block are in the same image frame, the first-direction motion vector is used as the time-domain offset vector; when the corresponding When the image frame where the sub-block is located is obtained from the first reference frame list, it is determined whether the first-direction reference frame and the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is located are the same
  • the third preset motion The vector is used as the time domain offset vector.
  • the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position is used as the time
  • the domain offset vector is specifically: when the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located is obtained from the second reference frame list and the display order of all reference frames in the reference frame list of the block to be processed is in the Before the image frame where the block to be processed is located, determine whether the second-direction reference frame and the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is located are the same; when the second-direction reference frame and the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is located are the same At the same time, the second-direction motion vector is used as the time-domain offset vector; when the second-direction reference frame and the corresponding sub-block are located in different image frames and the first-direction reference frame and the corresponding When the image frames where the sub-blocks are located are the same, the first motion vector is used as the time domain offset vector; when the image frame where the corresponding sub-blocks are located are the same, the first motion vector is used as the time domain offset vector; when the image
  • the third preset motion The vector is used as the time domain offset vector.
  • whether the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located is obtained from the first/second reference frame list can be obtained according to the syntax element collocated_from_l0_flag in the parsing code stream.
  • collocated_from_l0_flag 1
  • it means that the image frame (corresponding image) in which the corresponding sub-block is located is obtained from the first reference frame list
  • the collocated_from_l0_flag information is not carried in the code stream, the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located is obtained from the first reference frame list by default.
  • the display order of all reference frames in the reference frame list of the to-be-processed block is before the image frame where the to-be-processed block is located, that is, a low-delay encoding frame structure is adopted.
  • the reference frame used is the display order before the current frame to be encoded.
  • the reference frames used are all in the display order before the current frame to be decoded.
  • the adjacent spatial block will not adopt bidirectional prediction, and implementations involving bidirectional prediction may not achieve good technical effects. Therefore, optionally, you can Before performing the above-mentioned implementation involving bidirectional prediction, it is judged whether the coding region where the spatial neighboring block is located is of type B.
  • S1202. Determine whether the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block of the corresponding sub-block is available.
  • the position of the corresponding sub-block of the sub-block in the corresponding image may be determined according to the position coordinates of a sub-block (may be called an example sub-block) in the block to be processed and the time-domain offset vector determined in step S1201.
  • a sub-block may be called an example sub-block
  • the position of the corresponding sub-block can be obtained in the manner of formula (4) herein.
  • x and y respectively represent the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the upper left vertex of the block to be processed
  • i, j indicate that the sample sub-block is arranged in the block to be processed
  • x off and y off represent the horizontal and vertical coordinates of the time domain offset vector
  • M and N represent the width and height of the sub-block
  • x (i, j) and y (i, j) respectively represent the position coordinates of the corresponding sub-blocks of the example sub-blocks (may be referred to as the corresponding sub-blocks for short).
  • M/2 and N/2 in formula (4) indicate that the position in the preset block is the geometric center position of the corresponding sub-block.
  • the position in the preset block can also be other positions in the block such as the upper left vertex of the corresponding sub-block, and is not limited.
  • the motion vector corresponding to the preset position in the corresponding sub-block can also be used as the motion vector of the corresponding sub-block.
  • the prediction unit in the corresponding image where the position coordinates are located can be determined, and the preset block of the corresponding sub-block can be determined according to the prediction information of the prediction unit Whether the motion vector corresponding to the inner position is available.
  • the prediction unit is a result of the actual encoding of the corresponding image, and may be inconsistent with the corresponding sub-block.
  • the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block is available, and when the prediction mode of the prediction unit is intra prediction or intra block copy mode, The motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block is not available.
  • the prediction mode information of the prediction unit may be examined, and the prediction mode of the prediction unit may be determined according to the prediction mode information as intra prediction, inter prediction, or intra block copy mode and other modes.
  • the motion information of the prediction unit can be examined, for example, the prediction direction can be examined.
  • the prediction direction identifier predFlagL0 and/or predFlagL1 is 1, it is inter prediction, otherwise it is intra prediction mode or other motion. Prediction mode where vectors are not available.
  • the motion vector of the corresponding sub-block is not available, the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed is obtained according to the first preset motion vector.
  • the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block is available, and the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed is obtained according to the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block Vector.
  • the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block may be scaled to obtain the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed .
  • the first time-domain distance difference is the difference in picture sequence count between the image frame in which the block to be processed is located and the reference frame of the block to be processed
  • the second time-domain distance difference is the corresponding sub-block
  • the index of the reference frame of the to-be-processed block in the reference frame list of the to-be-processed block is obtained by parsing the code stream, that is, the reference frame of the to-be-processed block can be determined by parsing the corresponding information in the code stream at the decoding end .
  • the image frame with the best performance can be determined as the reference frame of the block to be processed by RDO selection, or a certain frame can be designated as the reference frame of the block to be processed, and the instruction information of the reference frame of the block to be processed can be written Code stream.
  • the reference frame of the block to be processed can also be set according to the pre-protocol of the codec.
  • the index of the reference frame of the to-be-processed block in the reference frame list of the to-be-processed block is 0.
  • the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block may be directly obtained from the motion vector storage unit corresponding to the position, it may also be obtained from the motion vector storage unit of the adjacent position, or may be stored according to the motion vector of the adjacent position.
  • the motion vector in the unit is obtained by interpolation filtering, which is not limited.
  • the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block is not available, and the sub-frame of the block to be processed is obtained according to the first preset motion vector.
  • the motion vector of the block is obtained according to the first preset motion vector.
  • the motion vector of the sub-block includes a first-direction sub-block motion vector based on a first reference frame list and/or a second-direction sub-block motion vector based on a second reference frame list, so
  • obtaining the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed according to the first preset motion vector is specifically: determining the sub-block of the block to be processed The block adopts unidirectional prediction based on the first-direction sub-block motion vector, and obtains the first-direction sub-block motion vector of the sub-block of the to-be-processed block according to the first preset motion vector; or, determining the The sub-block of the block to be processed adopts unidirectional prediction based on the second-direction sub-block motion vector, and the second-direction sub-block motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed is obtained according to the first preset motion vector.
  • the motion vector of the sub-block includes a first-direction sub-block motion vector based on a first reference frame list and a second-direction sub-block motion vector based on a second reference frame list.
  • the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block is not available
  • the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed is acquired according to the first preset motion vector, specifically: when the code of the block to be processed is located
  • the prediction type of the region is B-type prediction
  • the first-direction sub-block motions of the sub-blocks of the block to be processed are respectively obtained according to the first preset motion vector Vector and the second-directional sub-block motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed
  • the prediction type of the coding region where the block to be processed is located is P-type prediction, it is determined that the sub-block of the block to be processed adopts unidirectional Predict, and obtain the first sub-block
  • the coding area includes: an image, a strip, a slice or a slice group.
  • the obtaining the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed according to the first preset motion vector includes: using the first preset motion vector as the sub-block of the block to be processed The motion vector of the block.
  • the first preset motion vector is a zero motion vector.
  • the flag predFlagL0 of the first-direction prediction can be set to 1, the flag predFlagL1 of the second-direction prediction is 0, and the first-direction sub-block motion vector mvL0 can be set to (0, 0);
  • the flag predFlagL0 for the first-direction prediction can be set to 0, the flag predFlagL1 for the second-direction prediction is 1, and the second-direction sub-block motion vector mvL1 is (0, 0);
  • the flag predFlagL0 of the first-direction prediction can be set to 1, the flag predFlagL1 of the second-direction prediction is 1, and the first The one-directional sub-block motion vector mvL0 is (0, 0), and the second-directional sub-block motion vector mvL1 is (0, 0); otherwise (when the coding area of the sample sub-block does not correspond to the above-mentioned bidirectional prediction area), you can set The flag predFlagL0 of the first-direction prediction is 1, the flag predFlagL1 of the second-direction prediction is 0, and the first-direction sub-block motion vector mvL0 is (0, 0).
  • the processing procedure of the foregoing processing example sub-block is performed, and the predicted value of each sub-block can be obtained. Since the block to be processed is composed of sub-blocks, after the predicted value of each sub-block is determined, the predicted value of the block to be processed is determined at the same time accordingly.
  • An inter-frame prediction apparatus 1300 includes:
  • the offset acquisition module 1301 is configured to determine the time domain offset vector of the to-be-processed block according to the spatial neighboring block of the to-be-processed block, and the time-domain offset vector is used to determine the sub-offset of the to-be-processed block.
  • the corresponding sub-block of the block; the motion vector acquisition module 1302 is used to determine the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed according to the motion vector of the corresponding sub-block, wherein, when the motion vector of the corresponding sub-block is not available At this time, the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed is obtained according to the first preset motion vector.
  • the offset acquisition module 1301 is specifically configured to: sequentially check whether the motion vectors of the neighboring blocks in the space at the first preset positions are available in a preset order, until the prediction is obtained. Set the motion vector of the neighboring block in the space domain available for the first motion vector in the sequence; use the motion vector of the neighboring block in the spatial domain available for the first motion vector in the preset sequence as the time domain offset vector.
  • the offset acquisition module 1301 is specifically configured to: when the motion vectors of the spatial neighboring blocks of the multiple first preset positions are not available, set the second preset motion vector As the time domain offset vector.
  • the second preset motion vector is a zero motion vector.
  • the offset acquisition module 1301 is specifically configured to: acquire the motion vector and reference frame of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position, wherein the spatial phase phase of the second preset position The motion vector of the neighboring block is available; the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position is used as the time domain offset vector.
  • the offset acquisition module 1301 is specifically configured to: when the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position is not available, use the third preset motion vector as the Time domain offset vector.
  • the third preset motion vector is a zero motion vector.
  • the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position includes a first-directional motion vector based on the first reference frame list, and the spatial phase at the second preset position
  • the reference frame of the neighboring block includes the first-direction reference frame corresponding to the first-direction motion vector
  • the offset acquisition module 1301 is specifically configured to: when the first-direction reference frame and the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is located When the same, the first motion vector is used as the time domain offset vector.
  • the offset acquisition module 1301 is specifically configured to: use the third preset motion vector As the time domain offset vector.
  • the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position further includes the motion vector based on the second reference
  • the second direction motion vector of the frame list the reference frame of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position includes the second direction reference frame corresponding to the second direction motion vector, when the first direction reference frame and the
  • the offset acquisition module 1301 is specifically configured to: when the second-direction reference frame and the image frame in which the corresponding sub-blocks are located are the same, The second-direction motion vector is used as the time domain offset vector; when the second-direction reference frame and the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located are different, the third preset motion vector is used as the time domain Offset vector.
  • the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position includes the motion vector based on the first reference frame The first-direction motion vector of the list and the second-direction motion vector based on the second reference frame list.
  • the reference frame of the spatial neighboring block at the second preset position includes the first-direction motion vector corresponding to the first-direction motion vector.
  • the offset acquisition module 1301 is specifically configured to: when the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located is acquired from the second reference frame list Time: when the second-direction reference frame and the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located are the same, use the second-direction motion vector as the time-domain offset vector; when the second-direction reference frame is When the image frames where the corresponding sub-blocks are located are different and the first-direction reference frame and the image frame where the corresponding sub-blocks are located are the same, the first-direction motion vector is used as the time domain offset vector; when the When the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is located is obtained from the first reference frame list: when the first-direction reference frame is the same as the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is located, the first-direction motion vector is used as the The time-domain offset vector; when the first-direction reference frame and the image frame in which the corresponding sub-
  • the offset obtaining module 1301 is specifically configured to: when the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located is obtained from the second reference frame list and the reference frame list of the block to be processed When the display order of all the reference frames in are before the image frame where the block to be processed is located: when the second-direction reference frame and the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is located are the same, move the second direction A vector is used as the time-domain offset vector; when the second-direction reference frame and the corresponding sub-block are in different image frames and the first-direction reference frame and the corresponding sub-block are in the same image frame, Use the first motion vector as the time domain offset vector; when the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located is obtained from the first reference frame list or at least one of the reference frame lists of the to-be-processed block When the display sequence of a reference frame is after the image frame where the block to be processed is located: when the first-direction reference frame and the image frame where the corresponding sub-block is
  • the offset acquisition module 1301 is specifically configured to: use the third preset motion vector as the time domain offset vector.
  • the index of the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located in the reference frame list of the spatial neighboring block of the block to be processed is obtained by parsing the code stream.
  • the condition that the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block is unavailable includes a combination of one or more of the following: the spatial neighboring block is not coded/decoded; or, the spatial neighboring block The block adopts intra prediction or intra block copy mode; or, the spatial neighboring block does not exist; or, the spatial neighboring block and the block to be processed are located in different coding regions.
  • the coding region includes: an image, a strip, a slice or a slice group.
  • it further includes: a judging module 1303 for judging whether the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block of the corresponding sub-block is available; correspondingly, the motion vector acquiring module 1302 specifically uses In: when the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block is available, obtain the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed according to the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block; When the motion vector corresponding to the position is not available, the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed is obtained according to the first preset motion vector.
  • the position within the preset block is the geometric center position of the corresponding sub-block.
  • the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block is not available;
  • the prediction unit where the position in the preset block is located uses inter-frame prediction, the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block is available.
  • the motion vector acquiring module 1302 is specifically configured to use the first preset motion vector as the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed.
  • the first preset motion vector is a zero motion vector.
  • the motion vector of the sub-block includes the first-direction sub-block motion vector based on the first reference frame list and/or the second-direction sub-block motion vector based on the second reference frame list, when When the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block is not available, the motion vector acquisition module 1302 is specifically configured to: determine that the sub-block of the block to be processed adopts unidirectional prediction based on the first-directional sub-block motion vector , And obtain the first-directional sub-block motion vector of the sub-block of the to-be-processed block according to the first preset motion vector; or determine that the sub-block of the to-be-processed block adopts the motion based on the second-direction sub-block One-way prediction of the vector, and the second-direction sub-block motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed is obtained according to the first preset motion vector.
  • the motion vector obtaining module 1302 is specifically configured to: when the prediction type of the coding region where the block to be processed is located is In the B-type prediction, it is determined that the sub-block of the block to be processed adopts bidirectional prediction, and the first-direction sub-block motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed and the sub-block to be processed are respectively obtained according to the first preset motion vector.
  • the second-direction sub-block motion vector of the sub-block of the processing block when the prediction type of the coding region where the block to be processed is located is P-type prediction, it is determined that the sub-block of the block to be processed adopts unidirectional prediction, and according to the The first preset motion vector obtains the first sub-block motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed.
  • the motion vector acquisition module 1302 is specifically configured to: perform a calculation on the motion vector corresponding to the position in the preset block based on the ratio of the first time domain distance difference and the second time domain distance difference. Scaling processing to obtain the motion vector of the sub-block of the block to be processed, wherein the first time-domain distance difference is the image sequence count of the image frame where the block to be processed is located and the reference frame of the block to be processed Difference, the second time-domain distance difference is the difference in the sequence count of the image frame in which the corresponding sub-block is located and the reference frame of the corresponding sub-block.
  • the index of the reference frame of the to-be-processed block in the reference frame list of the to-be-processed block is obtained by parsing a code stream.
  • the index of the reference frame of the to-be-processed block in the reference frame list of the to-be-processed block is 0.
  • each module in the embodiment of the present application shown in FIG. 13 is used to execute the method shown in FIG. 12 and each feasible implementation manner, and has the same technical effect.
  • Step 1 Confirm the offset motion vector (offset motion vector)
  • the offset motion vector (offset motion vector) is used to determine the position of the corresponding block of the current CU in the collocated picture, and the offset motion vector may use the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block of the current CU. According to the offset motion vector and the corresponding image of the current frame, the position of the current CU in the corresponding image is determined, which is called a corresponding block (corresponding/collocated block).
  • the acquisition of the offset motion vector may be one of the following methods:
  • Method 1 In an implementation, as shown in Fig. 6, if A1 is available, the offset motion vector is determined according to the following method.
  • A1 unavailability means that the block at A1 is not decoded, or it is not an inter prediction block (intra block copy, IBC), or this block is in the current slice or slice. , Tile group or image, it is considered as an unusable block.
  • the intra block copy mode may also be referred to as the intra block copy mode.
  • the offset motion vector of the current block is the motion vector corresponding to list1 of A1
  • A1 uses list1 for prediction
  • the reference frame predicted by A1 using list1 is the same as the collocated picture of the current frame. (By judging whether the POC is the same.
  • the reference frame idx and the corresponding POC number of the corresponding image idx are the same, the idx of the corresponding image of the current block can be obtained from the code stream)
  • a low-delay coding structure is used, that is, only images whose display order is before the current image are used for prediction.
  • the image type or slice type or tile group type of the current block is B
  • collocated_from_l0_flag 0, where collocated_from_l0_flag is 1 means that the co-located image for time-domain motion vector prediction is obtained from the reference image queue list0. If it is 0, it means that the co-located image for temporal motion vector prediction is obtained from the reference image queue list1. When it does not appear in the code stream, the value is 1.
  • the offset motion vector is the motion vector corresponding to list0 of A1.
  • A1 uses list0 for prediction
  • A1 uses list0 to predict the reference frame is the same as the collocated picture of the current frame.
  • Method 2 For example, according to the order of A1, B1, B0, A0 in Fig. 6, find the first available motion vector of the adjacent block, if it points to the corresponding image, use it as the offset motion vector of the current CU. Otherwise, the zero motion vector can be used, or it can be scaled to point to the corresponding image as the offset motion vector of the current CU.
  • the offset vector used may also be a zero offset vector.
  • the image block in the corresponding image at the same position as the block to be processed is the corresponding block of the block to be processed in the corresponding image.
  • the ATMVP technology may not be used, but other technologies may be used to obtain the motion vector of the sub-block to be processed.
  • Step 2 Obtain ATMVP availability information and default sports information
  • the corresponding block can be obtained according to the offset vector first, and the prediction mode of the corresponding sub-block S at the preset position in the corresponding block can be obtained, and the coordinates (xcol, ycol) of the preset position can be obtained according to formula (6).
  • the default motion information and availability of ATMVP are obtained according to the prediction mode and motion information of the corresponding sub-block S.
  • the specific method is as follows:
  • (x, y) represents the coordinates of the upper left vertex of the current CU
  • (x off , y off ) represents the offset motion vector
  • W represents the current CU width
  • H represents the current CU height.
  • the prediction mode of the sub-block S corresponding to the preset position is the intra prediction mode or the intra block copy mode, the ATMVP motion information is not available.
  • the motion information of the corresponding sub-block S is further extracted, and the coordinates of the preset position are obtained according to formula (6), and then the motion vector field of the corresponding image
  • the motion information of the position in the corresponding sub-block is used as the S motion information of the corresponding sub-block.
  • the motion information of the corresponding sub-block S is called the default motion information of the corresponding sub-block.
  • the default motion vector MV of the corresponding sub-block S is scaled to obtain the default motion vector MVs of the sub-block to be processed, and the scaled motion vector MVs is used as the default motion information.
  • formula (7) can be used to obtain the scaled MVs.
  • the zoom method is not specifically limited here.
  • the POC number of the frame where the current block is located is CurPoc
  • the POC number of the reference frame of the current block is CurRefPoc
  • the POC number of the corresponding image is ColPoc
  • the POC number of the reference frame corresponding to the sub-block is ColRefPoc
  • the motion vector to be scaled is MV.
  • the MV is decomposed into a horizontal motion vector MVx and a vertical motion vector MVy, which are respectively calculated according to the above formula to obtain a horizontal motion vector MVsx and a vertical motion vector MVsy.
  • Step 3 Determine the motion information of the sub-block to be processed according to the motion information of the corresponding sub-block
  • the corresponding sub-block of the sub-block in the corresponding image is determined, and the motion information of the corresponding sub-block is obtained.
  • the prediction mode of the corresponding sub-block obtains the prediction mode of the corresponding sub-block. If the prediction mode of the corresponding sub-block is inter-frame prediction, and the motion information of the corresponding sub-block is available, the motion vector field of the corresponding image The motion information of the position is used as the motion information of the corresponding sub-block. The motion information of the corresponding sub-block is scaled to obtain the motion information of the sub-block to be processed.
  • the zooming method is the same as the method in step 2, and will not be repeated here.
  • the motion information of the corresponding sub-block is not available, and the default motion information obtained in step 2 can be used as the motion information of the corresponding sub-block.
  • Step 4 Perform motion compensation prediction according to the motion information of each sub-block to obtain the predicted pixel value of the current CU
  • the coordinates of the pixel point at the upper left corner of the sub-block are added to the motion vector to find the corresponding coordinate point in the reference frame. If the motion vector has sub-pixel accuracy, interpolation filtering is required to obtain the predicted pixel value of the sub-block; otherwise, the pixel value in the reference frame is directly obtained as the predicted pixel value of the sub-block.
  • Step 1 Confirm the offset motion vector (offset motion vector)
  • the offset motion vector (offset motion vector) is used to determine the position of the corresponding block of the current CU in the corresponding image, and the offset motion vector may use the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block of the current CU.
  • the reference frame of the neighboring block in the spatial domain is taken as the collocated picture of the current CU.
  • the position of the current CU in the corresponding image block is determined, which is called a corresponding block (corresponding/collocated block).
  • Step 2 Obtain the motion information of the corresponding sub-block
  • the corresponding block can be obtained according to the offset vector first, and then the corresponding sub-block with a relative position relationship with the sub-block to be processed is determined in the target image according to the position of the sub-block to be processed (it can also be understood as In the block, a corresponding sub-block that has a relative position relationship with the sub-block to be processed is determined).
  • the prediction mode of the corresponding sub-block obtains the prediction mode of the corresponding sub-block. If the prediction mode of the corresponding sub-block is inter-frame prediction, and the motion information of the corresponding sub-block is available, the motion vector field of the corresponding image The motion information of the position is used as the motion information of the corresponding sub-block.
  • the motion information of the current sub-block is derived from the motion information of the corresponding sub-block.
  • the motion vector of the corresponding sub-block is scaled and converted into the motion vector of the sub-block.
  • the zoom method can use the zoom method in the prior art, which will not be repeated here.
  • the prediction mode of the corresponding sub-block is intra prediction or intra-block copy mode
  • the motion information of the corresponding sub-block is not available.
  • one of the following processing methods can be used:
  • predFlagL0 1
  • predFlagL1 0
  • mvL0 0
  • mvL1 0.
  • predFlagL0 and predFlagL1 represent the prediction directions using list0 and list1 respectively
  • mvL0 and mvL1 represent the motion vectors used for prediction using list0 and list1, respectively
  • mvL1 0 means that the horizontal and vertical components of mvL1 are both zero.
  • Step 3 Perform motion compensation prediction according to the motion information of each sub-block to obtain the predicted pixel value of the current CU
  • the coordinates of the pixel point at the upper left corner of the sub-block are added to the motion vector to find the corresponding coordinate point in the reference frame. If the motion vector has sub-pixel accuracy, interpolation filtering is required to obtain the predicted pixel value of the sub-block; otherwise, the pixel value in the reference frame is directly obtained as the predicted pixel value of the sub-block.
  • Attached text revision (For the basis of text revision, please refer to JVET-N1001-v3. The meaning of the following pseudo-code can be referred to this text.
  • the text can be downloaded from the website http://phenix.int-evry.fr/jvet/ )
  • this embodiment of the application solves the need for complex initial offset motion vector calculation in the prior art, and directly fills the preset motion information to determine the availability information and default motion of ATMVP The problem of information reduces the complexity of encoding and decoding.
  • This embodiment relates to an inter-frame prediction method, which optimizes the method for obtaining offset motion vectors.
  • Steps 2 and 3 are the same as those of Embodiment A, and the specific description is as follows:
  • Step 1 Confirm the offset motion vector (offset motion vector)
  • the offset motion vector (offset motion vector) is used to determine the position of the corresponding block of the current CU in the corresponding image, and the offset motion vector may use the motion vector of the spatial neighboring block of the current CU.
  • the reference frame of the neighboring block in the spatial domain is taken as the collocated picture of the current CU.
  • the position of the current CU in the corresponding image block is determined, which is called a corresponding block (corresponding/collocated block).
  • the motion vector of A1 is used as the offset motion vector of the current CU
  • the acquisition of the offset motion vector may be one of the following methods. If A1 is not available, the offset motion vector value is 0.
  • A1 unavailability means that the block at A1 is not decoded, or is an intra prediction block or intra block copy mode, or this block is outside the current slice, slice, tile group, or image. Think it is an unusable block.
  • Method 1 Determine whether the following preset conditions are all met. If they all meet the preset conditions: check whether the reference frame corresponding to list1 of A1 is the same as the corresponding image of the current frame, if they are the same, use the motion vector corresponding to list1 as the offset motion If the vectors are different, check whether the reference frame corresponding to list0 is the same as the corresponding image of the current frame. If they are the same, use the motion vector corresponding to list0 as the offset motion vector; otherwise, the offset motion vector is 0.
  • the image type or slice type or tile group type of the current block is B.
  • collocated_from_l0_flag is 0, where collocated_from_l0_flag is 1 means that the co-located image for time-domain motion vector prediction is obtained from the reference image queue list0. If it is 0, it means that the co-located image for temporal motion vector prediction is obtained from the reference image queue list1. When it does not appear in the code stream, the value is 1.
  • Method 2 Determine whether the following preset conditions are all met, and if they all meet the preset conditions: Check whether the reference frame corresponding to list1 of A1 is the same as the corresponding image of the current frame, if they are the same, use the motion vector corresponding to list1 as the offset motion If the vectors are different, check whether the reference frame corresponding to list0 is the same as the corresponding image of the current frame. If they are the same, use the motion vector corresponding to list0 as the offset motion vector; otherwise, the offset motion vector is 0.
  • the image type or slice type or tile group type of the current block is B
  • collocated_from_l0_flag is 0, where collocated_from_l0_flag is 1 means that the co-located image for time-domain motion vector prediction is obtained from the reference image queue list0. If it is 0, it means that the co-located image for temporal motion vector prediction is obtained from the reference image queue list1. When it does not appear in the code stream, the value is 1.
  • Method 3 First check whether the reference frame corresponding to list0 of A1 and the corresponding image of the current frame are the same. If they are the same, use the motion vector corresponding to list0 of A1 as the offset motion vector, and there is no need to check whether the reference frame corresponding to list1 is the same as the current frame. Whether the corresponding images of the frames are the same. If the reference frame corresponding to list0 of A1 and the corresponding image of the current frame are not the same, and the image type or slice type or tile group type of the current block is B, it is also necessary to determine whether the reference frame of list1 is the same as the corresponding image of the current frame. If so, the motion vector corresponding to list1 of A1 can be used as the offset motion vector, otherwise, the offset motion vector is 0.
  • Method 4 Check whether the reference frame corresponding to the list0 of A1 and the corresponding image of the current frame are the same, if they are the same, use the motion vector corresponding to the list0 of A1 as the offset motion vector, otherwise, the offset motion vector is 0.
  • the index number (idx) of the corresponding image of the current frame of the image block can be obtained from the code stream.
  • the offset vector used may also be a zero offset vector.
  • the image block in the corresponding image at the same position as the block to be processed is the corresponding block of the block to be processed in the corresponding image.
  • the ATMVP technology may not be used, but other technologies may be used to obtain the motion vector of the sub-block to be processed.
  • checkL1First is set equal to 1:
  • --DiffPicOrderCnt(aPic,currPic) is less than or equal to 0 for every picture aPic in every reference picture list of the current slice
  • tempMV is set equal to mvLKA 1 :
  • K is set equal to(1--checkL1First),and if all of the following conditions are true,tempMV is set equal to mvLKA 1 :
  • checkL1First is set equal to 1:
  • tempMV is set equal to mvLKA 1 :
  • K is set equal to(1--checkL1First),and if all of the following conditions are true,tempMV is set equal to mvLKA 1 :
  • tempMV is set equal to mvL0A 1 :
  • tempMV is set equal to mvL1A 1 :
  • tempMV is set equal to mvL0A 1 :
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a new method for calculating the offset motion vector, which improves the coding and decoding efficiency while reducing the coding and decoding complexity.
  • the computer-readable medium may include a computer-readable storage medium, which corresponds to a tangible medium, such as a data storage medium, or a communication medium that includes any medium that facilitates the transfer of a computer program from one place to another (for example, according to a communication protocol) .
  • computer-readable media may generally correspond to (1) non-transitory tangible computer-readable storage media, or (2) communication media, such as signals or carrier waves.
  • Data storage media can be any available media that can be accessed by one or more computers or one or more processors to retrieve instructions, codes, and/or data structures for implementing the techniques described in this application.
  • the computer program product may include a computer-readable medium.
  • such computer-readable storage media may include RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM or other optical disk storage devices, magnetic disk storage devices or other magnetic storage devices, flash memory, or structures that can be used to store instructions or data Any other media that can be accessed by the computer in the form of desired program code. And, any connection is properly termed a computer-readable medium.
  • any connection is properly termed a computer-readable medium.
  • coaxial cable, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, digital subscriber line (DSL), or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio, and microwave to transmit instructions from a website, server, or other remote source
  • coaxial cable Wire, fiber optic cable, twisted pair, DSL or wireless technologies such as infrared, radio and microwave are included in the definition of media.
  • the computer-readable storage media and data storage media do not include connections, carrier waves, signals, or other temporary media, but are actually directed to non-transitory tangible storage media.
  • magnetic disks and optical discs include compact discs (CD), laser discs, optical discs, digital versatile discs (DVD), and Blu-ray discs. Disks usually reproduce data magnetically, while discs use lasers to reproduce data optically. data. Combinations of the above should also be included in the scope of computer-readable media.
  • DSP digital signal processors
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuits
  • FPGA field programmable logic arrays
  • processor may refer to any of the foregoing structure or any other structure suitable for implementing the techniques described herein.
  • DSP digital signal processors
  • ASIC application-specific integrated circuits
  • FPGA field programmable logic arrays
  • the term "processor” as used herein may refer to any of the foregoing structure or any other structure suitable for implementing the techniques described herein.
  • the functions described by the various illustrative logical blocks, modules, and steps described herein may be provided in dedicated hardware and/or software modules configured for encoding and decoding, or combined Into the combined codec.
  • the technology may be fully implemented in one or more circuits or logic elements.
  • the technology of this application can be implemented in a variety of devices or devices, including wireless handsets, integrated circuits (ICs), or a set of ICs (for example, chipsets).
  • ICs integrated circuits
  • a set of ICs for example, chipsets.
  • Various components, modules, or units are described in this application to emphasize the functional aspects of the device for performing the disclosed technology, but they do not necessarily need to be implemented by different hardware units.
  • various units can be combined with appropriate software and/or firmware in the codec hardware unit, or by interoperating hardware units (including one or more processors as described above). provide.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Multimedia (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Compression Or Coding Systems Of Tv Signals (AREA)

Abstract

本申请公开了一种帧间预测方法，待处理块包括一个或多个子块，所述方法包括：根据所述待处理块的空域相邻块，确定所述待处理块的时域偏移矢量，所述时域偏移矢量用于确定所述待处理块的子块的对应子块；根据所述对应子块的运动矢量，确定所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量，其中，当所述对应子块的运动矢量不可得时，根据第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量。实施本申请能够提高编解码中的预测准确性，提升编码效率。

Description

一种帧间预测的方法和装置
本申请要求于2019年5月17日提交中国国家知识产权局、申请号为201910414914.5、申请名称为“一种帧间预测的方法和装置”的中国专利申请的优先权，其全部内容通过引用结合在本申请中。
技术领域
本发明涉及视频编解码领域，尤其涉及一种视频图像的帧间预测方法和装置。
背景技术
数字视频能力可并入到多种多样的装置中，包含数字电视、数字直播系统、无线广播系统、个人数字助理(PDA)、膝上型或桌上型计算机、平板计算机、电子图书阅读器、数码相机、数字记录装置、数字媒体播放器、视频游戏装置、视频游戏控制台、蜂窝式或卫星无线电电话(所谓的“智能电话”)、视频电话会议装置、视频流式传输装置及其类似者。数字视频装置实施视频压缩技术，例如，在由MPEG-2、MPEG-4、ITU-T H.263、ITU-T H.264/MPEG-4第10部分高级视频编码(AVC)定义的标准、视频编码标准H.265/高效视频编码(HEVC)标准以及此类标准的扩展中所描述的视频压缩技术。视频装置可通过实施此类视频压缩技术来更有效率地发射、接收、编码、解码和/或存储数字视频信息。
视频压缩技术执行空间(图像内)预测和/或时间(图像间)预测以减少或去除视频序列中固有的冗余。对于基于块的视频编码，视频条带(即，视频帧或视频帧的一部分)可分割成若干图像块，所述图像块也可被称作树块、编码单元(CU)和/或编码节点。使用关于同一图像中的相邻块中的参考样本的空间预测来编码图像的待帧内编码(I)条带中的图像块。图像的待帧间编码(P或B)条带中的图像块可使用相对于同一图像中的相邻块中的参考样本的空间预测或相对于其它参考图像中的参考样本的时间预测。图像可被称作帧，且参考图像可被称作参考帧。
发明内容
本申请实施例提供一种视频图像的帧间预测方法、装置及相应的编码器和解码器，在提高图像块的运动信息的预测准确性的同时，降低了实现复杂度。
第一方面，本申请实施例提供一种帧间预测方法，待处理块包括一个或多个子块，所述方法包括：根据所述待处理块的空域相邻块，确定所述待处理块的时域偏移矢量，所述时域偏移矢量用于确定所述待处理块的子块的对应子块；根据所述对应子块的运动矢量，确定所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量，其中，当所述对应子块的运动矢量不可得时，根据第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量。
本实施方式以子块为获取运动矢量的单元，提高了运动矢量预测的精准度，提高了编码效率，同时，当对应子块的运动矢量不可得时，基于预设的运动矢量获取子块的运动矢量，与推导得到默认运动矢量的方法相比，降低了实现的复杂度。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述根据所述待处理块的空域相邻块，确定所述待处理块 的时域偏移矢量，包括：按照预设顺序依次检查多个第一预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量是否可得，直到获取所述预设顺序中第一个运动矢量可得的空域相邻块的运动矢量；将所述预设顺序中第一个运动矢量可得的空域相邻块的运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
本实施方式利用多个空域相邻块获得时域偏移矢量，充分利用了预测对象的空间相关性。
在一种可行的实施方式中，当所述多个第一预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量均不可得时，将第二预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述第二预设运动矢量为零运动矢量。
本实施方式采用零运动矢量作为多个预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量均不可得时的备用方案，降低了实现的复杂度。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述根据所述待处理块的空域相邻块，确定所述待处理块的时域偏移矢量，包括：获取第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量和参考帧，其中，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量可得；将所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
本实施方式利用预设位置空域相邻块获得时域偏移矢量，免去了前述实施例中检查的步骤，进一步降低了实现复杂度。
在一种可行的实施方式中，当所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量不可得时，将第三预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述第三预设运动矢量为零运动矢量。
本实施方式采用零运动矢量作为预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量不可得时的备用方案，降低了实现的复杂度。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量包括基于所述第一参考帧列表的第一向运动矢量，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的参考帧包括所述第一向运动矢量对应的第一向参考帧，所述将所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量，包括：当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同时，包括：将所述第三预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，当所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块采用双向预测时，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量还包括基于所述第二参考帧列表的第二向运动矢量，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的参考帧包括所述第二向运动矢量对应的第二向参考帧，当所述第一向参考帧和所述待处理块的时域对应块所在的图像帧不同时，包括：当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同时，将所述第三预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，当所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块采用双向预测时，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量包括基于所述第一参考帧列表的第一向运动矢量和基于所述第二参考帧列表的第二向运动矢量，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的参考帧包括所述第一向运动矢量对应的第一向参考帧和所述第二向运动矢量对应的第二向参考 帧，所述将所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量，包括：当所述对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第二参考帧列表中获取时：当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第一参考帧列表中获取时：当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述将所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量，包括：当所述对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第二参考帧列表中获取且所述待处理块的参考帧列表中的全部参考帧的显示顺序均在所述待处理块所在的图像帧之前时：当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第一参考帧列表中获取或所述待处理块的参考帧列表中的至少一个参考帧的显示顺序在所述待处理块所在的图像帧之后时：当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同时，将所述第三预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
上述各种实施方式是获取时域偏移矢量的不同方法，具有不同的性能和实现复杂度，可以依据实现复杂度的要求，选择具体的实施方式实现方案。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述对应子块所在的图像帧在所述待处理块的空域相邻块的参考帧列表中的索引通过解析所述码流获取。
本实施方式使对应子块所在的图像帧的选取具有多种可能性，提高了编码性能。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述空域相邻块的运动矢量不可得的条件包括下列一项或多项的组合：所述空域相邻块未编码/解码；或者，所述空域相邻块采用帧内预测或帧内块复制模式；或者，所述空域相邻块不存在；或者，所述空域相邻块和所述待处理块位于不同的编码区域。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述编码区域包括：图像、条带、片或片组。
在一种可行的实施方式中，在所述确定所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量之前，还包括：判断所述对应子块的预设块内位置对应的运动矢量是否可得；对应的，所述确定所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量，包括：当所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量可得时，根据所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量；当所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量不可得时，根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述预设块内位置为所述对应子块的几何中心位置。
本实施方式以几何中心位置为预设块内位置，还可以以对应子块的左上顶点等其它块内位置作为预设块内位置。
在一种可行的实施方式中，当所述预设块内位置所在的预测单元采用帧内预测或帧内块复制模式时，所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量不可得；当所述预设块内位置所在的预测单元采用帧间预测时，所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量可得。
本实施方式采用预测模式来判断对应子块运动矢量是否可得，进一步降低了实现复杂度。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述根据第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量，包括：将所述第一预设运动矢量作为所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述第一预设运动矢量为零运动矢量。
本实施方式采用零运动矢量作为对应子块运动矢量不可得时，作为待处理块的子块的运动矢量的备用方案，进一步降低了实现复杂度。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述子块的运动矢量包括基于第一参考帧列表的第一向子块运动矢量和/或基于第二参考帧列表的第二向子块运动矢量，当所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量不可得时，所述根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量，包括：确定所述待处理块的子块采用基于所述第一向子块运动矢量的单向预测，且根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的第一向子块运动矢量；或者，确定所述待处理块的子块采用基于所述第二向子块运动矢量的单向预测，且根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的第二向子块运动矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，当所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量不可得时，所述根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量，包括：当所述待处理块所在的编码区域的预测类型为B型预测时，确定所述待处理块的子块采用双向预测，且根据所述第一预设运动矢量分别获取所述待处理块的子块的第一向子块运动矢量和所述待处理块的子块的第二向子块运动矢量；当所述待处理块所在的编码区域的预测类型为P型预测时，确定所述待处理块的子块采用单向预测，且根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的第一向子块运动矢量。
应理解，所述待处理块所在的编码区域的预测类型为B型预测是指，待处理块所在的区域为B类型区域，例如待处理块位于B帧，位于B条带，位于B片，位于B片组等等，在此情况下待处理块被允许使用双向预测，也被允许使用单向预测。所述待处理块所在的编码区域的预测类型为P型预测是指，待处理块所在的区域为P类型区域，例如待处理块位于P帧，位于P条带，位于P片，位于P片组等等，在此情况下待处理块仅被允许使用单向预测。
上述各种实施方式是根据对应子块的运动矢量，获取待处理块子块的不同方法，具有不同的性能和实现复杂度，可以依据实现复杂度的要求，选择具体的实施方式实现方案。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述根据所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量，包括：基于第一时域距离差和第二时域距离差的比值，对所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量进行缩放处理，以获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量，其中，所述第一时域距离差为所述待处理块所在的图像帧与所述待处理块的参考帧的图序计数差，所述第二时域距离差为所述对应子块所在的图像帧与所述对应子块的参考帧的图序计 数差。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述待处理块的参考帧在所述待处理块的参考帧列表中的索引通过解析码流获取。
本实施方式使参考帧的选取具有多种可能性，提高了编码性能。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述待处理块的参考帧在所述待处理块的参考帧列表中的索引为0。
当索引值为编解码端协议约定的数值时，节省了传输相关信息的码率。
在一种可行的实施方式中，还包括：基于所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量和所述待处理块的参考帧，对所述待处理块的子块进行运动补偿，以获取所述待处理块的子块的预测值。
本预测方式可以作为多种可能的帧间预测中的一种，可以参与候选预测矢量列表的构建，可以和融合模式(merge)，仿射预测模式(affine)等其它预测模式相结合等等，进而实现待处理块的重建。
第二方面，本申请实施例提供一种帧间预测装置，待处理块包括一个或多个子块，所述装置包括：偏移获取模块，用于根据所述待处理块的空域相邻块，确定所述待处理块的时域偏移矢量，所述时域偏移矢量用于确定所述待处理块的子块的对应子块；运动矢量获取模块，用于根据所述对应子块的运动矢量，确定所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量，其中，当所述对应子块的运动矢量不可得时，根据第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述偏移获取模块具体用于：按照预设顺序依次检查多个第一预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量是否可得，直到获取所述预设顺序中第一个运动矢量可得的空域相邻块的运动矢量；将所述预设顺序中第一个运动矢量可得的空域相邻块的运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述偏移获取模块具体用于：当所述多个第一预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量均不可得时，将第二预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述第二预设运动矢量为零运动矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述偏移获取模块具体用于：获取第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量和参考帧，其中，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量可得；将所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述偏移获取模块具体用于：当所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量不可得时，将第三预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述第三预设运动矢量为零运动矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量包括基于所述第一参考帧列表的第一向运动矢量，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的参考帧包括所述第一向运动矢量对应的第一向参考帧，所述偏移获取模块具体用于：当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同时，所述偏移获取模块具体用于：将所述第三预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，当所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块采用双向预测时，所述 第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量还包括基于所述第二参考帧列表的第二向运动矢量，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的参考帧包括所述第二向运动矢量对应的第二向参考帧，当所述第一向参考帧和所述待处理块的时域对应块所在的图像帧不同时，所述偏移获取模块具体用于：当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同时，将所述第三预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，当所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块采用双向预测时，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量包括基于所述第一参考帧列表的第一向运动矢量和基于所述第二参考帧列表的第二向运动矢量，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的参考帧包括所述第一向运动矢量对应的第一向参考帧和所述第二向运动矢量对应的第二向参考帧，所述偏移获取模块具体用于：当所述对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第二参考帧列表中获取时：当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第一参考帧列表中获取时：当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述偏移获取模块具体用于：当所述对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第二参考帧列表中获取且所述待处理块的参考帧列表中的全部参考帧的显示顺序均在所述待处理块所在的图像帧之前时：当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第一参考帧列表中获取或所述待处理块的参考帧列表中的至少一个参考帧的显示顺序在所述待处理块所在的图像帧之后时：当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同时，所述偏移获取模块具体用于：将所述第三预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述对应子块所在的图像帧在所述待处理块的空域相邻块的参考帧列表中的索引通过解析所述码流获取。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述空域相邻块的运动矢量不可得的条件包括下列一项或多项的组合：所述空域相邻块未编码/解码；或者，所述空域相邻块采用帧内预测或帧内块复制模式；或者，所述空域相邻块不存在；或者，所述空域相邻块和所述待处理块位于不同的编码区域。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述编码区域包括：图像、条带、片或片组。
在一种可行的实施方式中，还包括：判断模块，用于判断所述对应子块的预设块内位置对应的运动矢量是否可得；对应的，所述运动矢量获取模块具体用于：当所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量可得时，根据所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量；当所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量不可得时，根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述预设块内位置为所述对应子块的几何中心位置。
在一种可行的实施方式中，当所述预设块内位置所在的预测单元采用帧内预测或帧内块复制模式时，所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量不可得；当所述预设块内位置所在的预测单元采用帧间预测时，所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量可得。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述运动矢量获取模块具体用于：将所述第一预设运动矢量作为所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述第一预设运动矢量为零运动矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述子块的运动矢量包括基于第一参考帧列表的第一向子块运动矢量和/或基于第二参考帧列表的第二向子块运动矢量，当所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量不可得时，所述运动矢量获取模块具体用于：确定所述待处理块的子块采用基于所述第一向子块运动矢量的单向预测，且根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的第一向子块运动矢量；或者，确定所述待处理块的子块采用基于所述第二向子块运动矢量的单向预测，且根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的第二向子块运动矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，当所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量不可得时，所述运动矢量获取模块具体用于：当所述待处理块所在的编码区域的预测类型为B型预测时，确定所述待处理块的子块采用双向预测，且根据所述第一预设运动矢量分别获取所述待处理块的子块的第一向子块运动矢量和所述待处理块的子块的第二向子块运动矢量；当所述待处理块所在的编码区域的预测类型为P型预测时，确定所述待处理块的子块采用单向预测，且根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的第一向子块运动矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述运动矢量获取模块具体用于：基于第一时域距离差和第二时域距离差的比值，对所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量进行缩放处理，以获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量，其中，所述第一时域距离差为所述待处理块所在的图像帧与所述待处理块的参考帧的图序计数差，所述第二时域距离差为所述对应子块所在的图像帧与所述对应子块的参考帧的图序计数差。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述待处理块的参考帧在所述待处理块的参考帧列表中的索引通过解析码流获取。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述待处理块的参考帧在所述待处理块的参考帧列表中的索引为0。
在一种可行的实施方式中，还包括：运动补偿模块，用于基于所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量和所述待处理块的参考帧，对所述待处理块的子块进行运动补偿，以获取所述待处理块的子块的预测值。
第三方面，本申请实施例提供一种视频编码器，所述视频编码器用于编码图像块，包括：如本申请实施例第二方面所述的帧间预测装置，其中所述帧间预测装置用于基于目标 候选运动信息预测当前编码图像块的运动信息，基于所述当前编码图像块的运动信息确定所述当前编码图像块的预测像素值；
熵编码模块，用于将所述目标候选运动信息的索引标识编入码流，所述索引标识指示用于所述当前编码图像块的所述目标候选运动信息；
重建模块，用于基于所述预测像素值重建所述当前编码图像块。
第四方面，本申请实施例提供一种视频解码器，所述视频解码器用于从码流中解码出图像块，包括：熵解码模块，用于从码流中解码出索引标识，所述索引标识用于指示当前解码图像块的目标候选运动信息；如本申请实施例第二方面所述的帧间预测装置，所述帧间预测装置用于基于所述索引标识指示的目标候选运动信息预测当前解码图像块的运动信息，基于所述当前解码图像块的运动信息确定所述当前解码图像块的预测像素值；
重建模块，用于基于所述预测像素值重建所述当前解码图像块。
第五方面，本申请实施例提供一种编码设备，包括：相互耦合的非易失性存储器和处理器，所述处理器调用存储在所述存储器中的程序代码以执行第一方面的任意一种方法的部分或全部步骤。
第六方面，本申请实施例提供一种解码设备，包括：相互耦合的非易失性存储器和处理器，所述处理器调用存储在所述存储器中的程序代码以执行第一方面的任意一种方法的部分或全部步骤。
第七方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质存储了程序代码，其中，所述程序代码包括用于执行第一方面的任意一种方法的部分或全部步骤的指令。
第八方面，本申请实施例提供一种计算机程序产品，当所述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行第一方面的任意一种方法的部分或全部步骤。
第九方面，本申请实施例提供了一种帧间预测方法，待处理块包括一个或多个子块，所述方法包括：获取所述待处理块的空域相邻块；根据所述空域相邻块，获得时域偏移矢量，所述时域偏移矢量用于确定所述待处理块的子块的对应子块，其中，在所述空域相邻块具有位于第一参考帧列表中的第一向参考帧，且所述对应子块所在的图像帧和所述第一向参考帧相同的情况下，所述时域偏移矢量为所述空域相邻块的第一向运动矢量，所述第一向运动矢量对应于所述第一向参考帧。
在一种可行的实施方式中，在所述空域相邻块不具有位于第一参考帧列表中的第一向参考帧，或所述对应子块所在的图像帧和所述第一向参考帧不同的情况下，还包括：在所述空域相邻块具有位于第二参考帧列表中的第二向参考帧，且所述对应子块所在的图像帧和所述第二向参考帧相同的情况下，所述时域偏移矢量为所述空域相邻块的第二向运动矢量，所述第二向运动矢量对应于所述第二向参考帧。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述获取所述待处理块的空域相邻块，包括：检查所述空域相邻块是否可得；在所述空域相邻块可得的情况下，获取所述空域相邻块。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述对应子块所在的图像帧和所述第一向参考帧相同，包括：所述对应子块所在的图像帧的POC和所述第一向参考帧的POC相同。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述对应子块所在的图像帧和所述第二向参考帧相同，包括：所述对应子块所在的图像帧的POC和所述第二向参考帧的POC相同。
在一种可行的实施方式中，还包括：解析码流以获得所述对应子块所在的图像帧的索引信息。
在一种可行的实施方式中，还包括：将与所述待处理块具有预设关系的图像帧作为所 述对应子块所在的图像帧。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述预设关系，包括：所述对应子块所在的图像帧在解码顺序上与所述待处理块所在的图像帧相邻，且早于所述待处理块所在的图像帧解码。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述预设关系，包括：所述对应子块所在的图像帧为所述待处理块的第一向参考帧列表或第二向参考帧列表中参考帧索引为0的参考帧。
在一种可行的实施方式中，在所述空域相邻块不具有位于第二参考帧列表中的第二向参考帧，或所述对应子块所在的图像帧和所述第二向参考帧不同的情况下，还包括：将零运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
第十方面，本申请实施例提供了一种视频编解码设备，包括：相互耦合的非易失性存储器和处理器，所述处理器调用存储在所述存储器中的程序代码以执行如第九方面所描述的方法。
应当理解的是，本申请的第二至十方面与本申请的第一方面的技术方案一致，各方面及对应的可行实施方式所取得的有益效果相似，不再赘述。
附图说明
为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例或背景技术中的技术方案，下面将对本申请实施例或背景技术中所需要使用的附图进行说明。
图1A是用于实现本发明实施例的视频编码及解码系统10实例的框图；
图1B是用于实现本发明实施例的视频译码系统40实例的框图；
图2是用于实现本发明实施例的编码器20实例结构的框图；
图3是用于实现本发明实施例的解码器30实例结构的框图；
图4是用于实现本发明实施例的视频译码设备400实例的框图；
图5是用于实现本发明实施例的另一种编码装置或解码装置实例的框图；
图6是用于实现本发明实施例的空域相邻块和时域参考块的示例性示意图；
图7是用于实现本发明实施例的AMVP预测模式的示例性示意图；
图8是用于实现本发明实施例的子块的示例性示意图；
图9是用于实现本发明实施例的一种帧间预测方法的示例性流程图；
图10是用于实现本发明实施例的运动矢量缩放处理的示例性示意图；
图11是用于实现本发明实施例的待处理块的子块与其对应子块的示例性示意图；
图12是用于实现本发明实施例的另一种帧间预测方法的示例性流程图；
图13是用于实现本发明实施例的一种帧间预测装置的示例性框图。
具体实施方式
下面结合本发明实施例中的附图对本发明实施例进行描述。以下描述中，参考形成本公开一部分并以说明之方式示出本发明实施例的具体方面或可使用本发明实施例的具体方面的附图。应理解，本发明实施例可在其它方面中使用，并可包括附图中未描绘的结构或逻辑变化。因此，以下详细描述不应以限制性的意义来理解，且本发明的范围由所附权利要求书界定。例如，应理解，结合所描述方法的揭示内容可以同样适用于用于执行所述方法的对应设备或系统，且反之亦然。例如，如果描述一个或多个具体方法步骤，则对应的设备可以包含如功能单元等一个或多个单元，来执行所描述的一个或多个方法步骤(例 如，一个单元执行一个或多个步骤，或多个单元，其中每个都执行多个步骤中的一个或多个)，即使附图中未明确描述或说明这种一个或多个单元。另一方面，例如，如果基于如功能单元等一个或多个单元描述具体装置，则对应的方法可以包含一个步骤来执行一个或多个单元的功能性(例如，一个步骤执行一个或多个单元的功能性，或多个步骤，其中每个执行多个单元中一个或多个单元的功能性)，即使附图中未明确描述或说明这种一个或多个步骤。进一步，应理解的是，除非另外明确提出，本文中所描述的各示例性实施例和/或方面的特征可以相互组合。
本发明实施例所涉及的技术方案不仅可能应用于现有的视频编码标准中(如H.264、HEVC等标准)，还可能应用于未来的视频编码标准中(如H.266标准)。本发明的实施方式部分使用的术语仅用于对本发明的具体实施例进行解释，而非旨在限定本发明。下面先对本发明实施例可能涉及的一些概念进行简单介绍。
视频编码通常是指处理形成视频或视频序列的图片序列。在视频编码领域，术语“图片(picture)”、“帧(frame)”或“图像(image)”可以用作同义词。本文中使用的视频编码表示视频编码或视频解码。视频编码在源侧执行，通常包括处理(例如，通过压缩)原始视频图片以减少表示该视频图片所需的数据量，从而更高效地存储和/或传输。视频解码在目的地侧执行，通常包括相对于编码器作逆处理，以重构视频图片。实施例涉及的视频图片“编码”应理解为涉及视频序列的“编码”或“解码”。编码部分和解码部分的组合也称为编解码(编码和解码)。
视频序列包括一系列图像(picture)，图像被进一步划分为切片(slice)，切片再被划分为块(block)。视频编码以块为单位进行编码处理，在一些新的视频编码标准中，块的概念被进一步扩展。比如，在H.264标准中有宏块(macroblock，MB)，宏块可进一步划分成多个可用于预测编码的预测块(partition)。在高性能视频编码(high efficiency video coding，HEVC)标准中，采用编码单元(coding unit，CU)，预测单元(prediction unit，PU)和变换单元(transform unit，TU)等基本概念，从功能上划分了多种块单元，并采用全新的基于树结构进行描述。比如CU可以按照四叉树进行划分为更小的CU，而更小的CU还可以继续划分，从而形成一种四叉树结构，CU是对编码图像进行划分和编码的基本单元。对于PU和TU也有类似的树结构，PU可以对应预测块，是预测编码的基本单元。对CU按照划分模式进一步划分成多个PU。TU可以对应变换块，是对预测残差进行变换的基本单元。然而，无论CU，PU还是TU，本质上都属于块(或称图像块)的概念。
例如在HEVC中，通过使用表示为编码树的四叉树结构将CTU拆分为多个CU。在CU层级处作出是否使用图片间(时间)或图片内(空间)预测对图片区域进行编码的决策。每个CU可以根据PU拆分类型进一步拆分为一个、两个或四个PU。一个PU内应用相同的预测过程，并在PU基础上将相关信息传输到解码器。在通过基于PU拆分类型应用预测过程获取残差块之后，可以根据类似于用于CU的编码树的其它四叉树结构将CU分割成变换单元(transform unit，TU)。在视频压缩技术最新的发展中，使用四叉树和二叉树(Quad-tree and binary tree，QTBT)分割帧来分割编码块。在QTBT块结构中，CU可以为正方形或矩形形状。
本文中，为了便于描述和理解，可将当前编码图像中待编码的图像块称为当前块，例如在编码中，指当前正在编码的块；在解码中，指当前正在解码的块。将参考图像中用于 对当前块进行预测的已解码的图像块称为参考块，即参考块是为当前块提供参考信号的块，其中，参考信号表示图像块内的像素值。可将参考图像中为当前块提供预测信号的块为预测块，其中，预测信号表示预测块内的像素值或者采样值或者采样信号。例如，在遍历多个参考块以后，找到了最佳参考块，此最佳参考块将为当前块提供预测，此块称为预测块。
无损视频编码情况下，可以重构原始视频图片，即经重构视频图片具有与原始视频图片相同的质量(假设存储或传输期间没有传输损耗或其它数据丢失)。在有损视频编码情况下，通过例如量化执行进一步压缩，来减少表示视频图片所需的数据量，而解码器侧无法完全重构视频图片，即经重构视频图片的质量相比原始视频图片的质量较低或较差。
H.261的几个视频编码标准属于“有损混合型视频编解码”(即，将样本域中的空间和时间预测与变换域中用于应用量化的2D变换编码结合)。视频序列的每个图片通常分割成不重叠的块集合，通常在块层级上进行编码。换句话说，编码器侧通常在块(视频块)层级处理亦即编码视频，例如，通过空间(图片内)预测和时间(图片间)预测来产生预测块，从当前块(当前处理或待处理的块)减去预测块以获取残差块，在变换域变换残差块并量化残差块，以减少待传输(压缩)的数据量，而解码器侧将相对于编码器的逆处理部分应用于经编码或经压缩块，以重构用于表示的当前块。另外，编码器复制解码器处理循环，使得编码器和解码器生成相同的预测(例如帧内预测和帧间预测)和/或重构，用于处理亦即编码后续块。
下面描述本发明实施例所应用的系统架构。参见图1A，图1A示例性地给出了本发明实施例所应用的视频编码及解码系统10的示意性框图。如图1A所示，视频编码及解码系统10可包括源设备12和目的地设备14，源设备12产生经编码视频数据，因此，源设备12可被称为视频编码装置。目的地设备14可对由源设备12所产生的经编码的视频数据进行解码，因此，目的地设备14可被称为视频解码装置。源设备12、目的地设备14或两个的各种实施方案可包含一或多个处理器以及耦合到所述一或多个处理器的存储器。所述存储器可包含但不限于RAM、ROM、EEPROM、快闪存储器或可用于以可由计算机存取的指令或数据结构的形式存储所要的程序代码的任何其它媒体，如本文所描述。源设备12和目的地设备14可以包括各种装置，包含桌上型计算机、移动计算装置、笔记型(例如，膝上型)计算机、平板计算机、机顶盒、例如所谓的“智能”电话等电话手持机、电视机、相机、显示装置、数字媒体播放器、视频游戏控制台、车载计算机、无线通信设备或其类似者。
虽然图1A将源设备12和目的地设备14绘示为单独的设备，但设备实施例也可以同时包括源设备12和目的地设备14或同时包括两者的功能性，即源设备12或对应的功能性以及目的地设备14或对应的功能性。在此类实施例中，可以使用相同硬件和/或软件，或使用单独的硬件和/或软件，或其任何组合来实施源设备12或对应的功能性以及目的地设备14或对应的功能性。
源设备12和目的地设备14之间可通过链路13进行通信连接，目的地设备14可经由链路13从源设备12接收经编码视频数据。链路13可包括能够将经编码视频数据从源设备12移动到目的地设备14的一或多个媒体或装置。在一个实例中，链路13可包括使得源设备12能够实时将经编码视频数据直接发射到目的地设备14的一或多个通信媒体。在此实例中，源设备12可根据通信标准(例如无线通信协议)来调制经编码视频数据，且可将 经调制的视频数据发射到目的地设备14。所述一或多个通信媒体可包含无线和/或有线通信媒体，例如射频(RF)频谱或一或多个物理传输线。所述一或多个通信媒体可形成基于分组的网络的一部分，基于分组的网络例如为局域网、广域网或全球网络(例如，因特网)。所述一或多个通信媒体可包含路由器、交换器、基站或促进从源设备12到目的地设备14的通信的其它设备。
源设备12包括编码器20，另外可选地，源设备12还可以包括图片源16、图片预处理器18、以及通信接口22。具体实现形态中，所述编码器20、图片源16、图片预处理器18、以及通信接口22可能是源设备12中的硬件部件，也可能是源设备12中的软件程序。分别描述如下：
图片源16，可以包括或可以为任何类别的图片捕获设备，用于例如捕获现实世界图片，和/或任何类别的图片或评论(对于屏幕内容编码，屏幕上的一些文字也认为是待编码的图片或图像的一部分)生成设备，例如，用于生成计算机动画图片的计算机图形处理器，或用于获取和/或提供现实世界图片、计算机动画图片(例如，屏幕内容、虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)图片)的任何类别设备，和/或其任何组合(例如，实景(augmented reality，AR)图片)。图片源16可以为用于捕获图片的相机或者用于存储图片的存储器，图片源16还可以包括存储先前捕获或产生的图片和/或获取或接收图片的任何类别的(内部或外部)接口。当图片源16为相机时，图片源16可例如为本地的或集成在源设备中的集成相机；当图片源16为存储器时，图片源16可为本地的或例如集成在源设备中的集成存储器。当所述图片源16包括接口时，接口可例如为从外部视频源接收图片的外部接口，外部视频源例如为外部图片捕获设备，比如相机、外部存储器或外部图片生成设备，外部图片生成设备例如为外部计算机图形处理器、计算机或服务器。接口可以为根据任何专有或标准化接口协议的任何类别的接口，例如有线或无线接口、光接口。
其中，图片可以视为像素点(picture element)的二维阵列或矩阵。阵列中的像素点也可以称为采样点。阵列或图片在水平和垂直方向(或轴线)上的采样点数目定义图片的尺寸和/或分辨率。为了表示颜色，通常采用三个颜色分量，即图片可以表示为或包含三个采样阵列。例如在RBG格式或颜色空间中，图片包括对应的红色、绿色及蓝色采样阵列。但是，在视频编码中，每个像素通常以亮度/色度格式或颜色空间表示，例如对于YUV格式的图片，包括Y指示的亮度分量(有时也可以用L指示)以及U和V指示的两个色度分量。亮度(luma)分量Y表示亮度或灰度水平强度(例如，在灰度等级图片中两者相同)，而两个色度(chroma)分量U和V表示色度或颜色信息分量。相应地，YUV格式的图片包括亮度采样值(Y)的亮度采样阵列，和色度值(U和V)的两个色度采样阵列。RGB格式的图片可以转换或变换为YUV格式，反之亦然，该过程也称为色彩变换或转换。如果图片是黑白的，该图片可以只包括亮度采样阵列。本发明实施例中，由图片源16传输至图片处理器的图片也可称为原始图片数据17。
图片预处理器18，用于接收原始图片数据17并对原始图片数据17执行预处理，以获取经预处理的图片19或经预处理的图片数据19。例如，图片预处理器18执行的预处理可以包括整修、色彩格式转换(例如，从RGB格式转换为YUV格式)、调色或去噪。
编码器20(或称视频编码器20)，用于接收经预处理的图片数据19，采用相关预测模式(如本文各个实施例中的预测模式)对经预处理的图片数据19进行处理，从而提供经 编码图片数据21(下文将进一步基于图2或图4或图5描述编码器20的结构细节)。在一些实施例中，编码器20可以用于执行后文所描述的各个实施例，以实现本发明所描述的色度块预测方法在编码侧的应用。
通信接口22，可用于接收经编码图片数据21，并可通过链路13将经编码图片数据21传输至目的地设备14或任何其它设备(如存储器)，以用于存储或直接重构，所述其它设备可为任何用于解码或存储的设备。通信接口22可例如用于将经编码图片数据21封装成合适的格式，例如数据包，以在链路13上传输。
目的地设备14包括解码器30，另外可选地，目的地设备14还可以包括通信接口28、图片后处理器32和显示设备34。分别描述如下：
通信接口28，可用于从源设备12或任何其它源接收经编码图片数据21，所述任何其它源例如为存储设备，存储设备例如为经编码图片数据存储设备。通信接口28可以用于藉由源设备12和目的地设备14之间的链路13或藉由任何类别的网络传输或接收经编码图片数据21，链路13例如为直接有线或无线连接，任何类别的网络例如为有线或无线网络或其任何组合，或任何类别的私网和公网，或其任何组合。通信接口28可以例如用于解封装通信接口22所传输的数据包以获取经编码图片数据21。
通信接口28和通信接口22都可以配置为单向通信接口或者双向通信接口，以及可以用于例如发送和接收消息来建立连接、确认和交换任何其它与通信链路和/或例如经编码图片数据传输的数据传输有关的信息。
解码器30(或称为解码器30)，用于接收经编码图片数据21并提供经解码图片数据31或经解码图片31(下文将进一步基于图3或图4或图5描述解码器30的结构细节)。在一些实施例中，解码器30可以用于执行后文所描述的各个实施例，以实现本发明所描述的色度块预测方法在解码侧的应用。
图片后处理器32，用于对经解码图片数据31(也称为经重构图片数据)执行后处理，以获得经后处理图片数据33。图片后处理器32执行的后处理可以包括：色彩格式转换(例如，从YUV格式转换为RGB格式)、调色、整修或重采样，或任何其它处理，还可用于将将经后处理图片数据33传输至显示设备34。
显示设备34，用于接收经后处理图片数据33以向例如用户或观看者显示图片。显示设备34可以为或可以包括任何类别的用于呈现经重构图片的显示器，例如，集成的或外部的显示器或监视器。例如，显示器可以包括液晶显示器(liquid crystal display，LCD)、有机发光二极管(organic light emitting diode，OLED)显示器、等离子显示器、投影仪、微LED显示器、硅基液晶(liquid crystal on silicon，LCoS)、数字光处理器(digital light processor，DLP)或任何类别的其它显示器。
虽然，图1A将源设备12和目的地设备14绘示为单独的设备，但设备实施例也可以同时包括源设备12和目的地设备14或同时包括两者的功能性，即源设备12或对应的功能性以及目的地设备14或对应的功能性。在此类实施例中，可以使用相同硬件和/或软件，或使用单独的硬件和/或软件，或其任何组合来实施源设备12或对应的功能性以及目的地设备14或对应的功能性。
本领域技术人员基于描述明显可知，不同单元的功能性或图1A所示的源设备12和/或目的地设备14的功能性的存在和(准确)划分可能根据实际设备和应用有所不同。源 设备12和目的地设备14可以包括各种设备中的任一个，包含任何类别的手持或静止设备，例如，笔记本或膝上型计算机、移动电话、智能手机、平板或平板计算机、摄像机、台式计算机、机顶盒、电视机、相机、车载设备、显示设备、数字媒体播放器、视频游戏控制台、视频流式传输设备(例如内容服务服务器或内容分发服务器)、广播接收器设备、广播发射器设备等，并可以不使用或使用任何类别的操作系统。
编码器20和解码器30都可以实施为各种合适电路中的任一个，例如，一个或多个微处理器、数字信号处理器(digital signal processor，DSP)、专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit，ASIC)、现场可编程门阵列(field-programmable gate array，FPGA)、离散逻辑、硬件或其任何组合。如果部分地以软件实施所述技术，则设备可将软件的指令存储于合适的非暂时性计算机可读存储介质中，且可使用一或多个处理器以硬件执行指令从而执行本公开的技术。前述内容(包含硬件、软件、硬件与软件的组合等)中的任一者可视为一或多个处理器。
在一些情况下，图1A中所示视频编码及解码系统10仅为示例，本申请的技术可以适用于不必包含编码和解码设备之间的任何数据通信的视频编码设置(例如，视频编码或视频解码)。在其它实例中，数据可从本地存储器检索、在网络上流式传输等。视频编码设备可以对数据进行编码并且将数据存储到存储器，和/或视频解码设备可以从存储器检索数据并且对数据进行解码。在一些实例中，由并不彼此通信而是仅编码数据到存储器和/或从存储器检索数据且解码数据的设备执行编码和解码。
参见图1B，图1B是根据一示例性实施例的包含图2的编码器20和/或图3的解码器30的视频译码系统40的实例的说明图。视频译码系统40可以实现本发明实施例的各种技术的组合。在所说明的实施方式中，视频译码系统40可以包含成像设备41、编码器20、解码器30(和/或藉由处理单元46的逻辑电路47实施的视频编/解码器)、天线42、一个或多个处理器43、一个或多个存储器44和/或显示设备45。
如图1B所示，成像设备41、天线42、处理单元46、逻辑电路47、编码器20、解码器30、处理器43、存储器44和/或显示设备45能够互相通信。如所论述，虽然用编码器20和解码器30绘示视频译码系统40，但在不同实例中，视频译码系统40可以只包含编码器20或只包含解码器30。
在一些实例中，天线42可以用于传输或接收视频数据的经编码比特流。另外，在一些实例中，显示设备45可以用于呈现视频数据。在一些实例中，逻辑电路47可以通过处理单元46实施。处理单元46可以包含专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit，ASIC)逻辑、图形处理器、通用处理器等。视频译码系统40也可以包含可选的处理器43，该可选处理器43类似地可以包含专用集成电路(application-specific integrated circuit，ASIC)逻辑、图形处理器、通用处理器等。在一些实例中，逻辑电路47可以通过硬件实施，如视频编码专用硬件等，处理器43可以通过通用软件、操作系统等实施。另外，存储器44可以是任何类型的存储器，例如易失性存储器(例如，静态随机存取存储器(Static Random Access Memory，SRAM)、动态随机存储器(Dynamic Random Access Memory，DRAM)等)或非易失性存储器(例如，闪存等)等。在非限制性实例中，存储器44可以由超速缓存内存实施。在一些实例中，逻辑电路47可以访问存储器44(例如用于实施图像缓冲器)。在其它实例中，逻辑电路47和/或处理单元46可以包含存储器(例如，缓存等)用 于实施图像缓冲器等。
在一些实例中，通过逻辑电路实施的编码器20可以包含(例如，通过处理单元46或存储器44实施的)图像缓冲器和(例如，通过处理单元46实施的)图形处理单元。图形处理单元可以通信耦合至图像缓冲器。图形处理单元可以包含通过逻辑电路47实施的编码器20，以实施参照图2和/或本文中所描述的任何其它编码器系统或子系统所论述的各种模块。逻辑电路可以用于执行本文所论述的各种操作。
在一些实例中，解码器30可以以类似方式通过逻辑电路47实施，以实施参照图3的解码器30和/或本文中所描述的任何其它解码器系统或子系统所论述的各种模块。在一些实例中，逻辑电路实施的解码器30可以包含(通过处理单元2820或存储器44实施的)图像缓冲器和(例如，通过处理单元46实施的)图形处理单元。图形处理单元可以通信耦合至图像缓冲器。图形处理单元可以包含通过逻辑电路47实施的解码器30，以实施参照图3和/或本文中所描述的任何其它解码器系统或子系统所论述的各种模块。
在一些实例中，天线42可以用于接收视频数据的经编码比特流。如所论述，经编码比特流可以包含本文所论述的与编码视频帧相关的数据、指示符、索引值、模式选择数据等，例如与编码分割相关的数据(例如，变换系数或经量化变换系数，(如所论述的)可选指示符，和/或定义编码分割的数据)。视频译码系统40还可包含耦合至天线42并用于解码经编码比特流的解码器30。显示设备45用于呈现视频帧。
应理解，本发明实施例中对于参考编码器20所描述的实例，解码器30可以用于执行相反过程。关于信令语法元素，解码器30可以用于接收并解析这种语法元素，相应地解码相关视频数据。在一些例子中，编码器20可以将语法元素熵编码成经编码视频比特流。在此类实例中，解码器30可以解析这种语法元素，并相应地解码相关视频数据。
需要说明的是，本发明实施例描述的运动矢量的预测方法主要用于帧间预测过程，此过程在编码器20和解码器30均存在，本发明实施例中的编码器20和解码器30可以是例如H.263、H.264、HEVV、MPEG-2、MPEG-4、VP8、VP9等视频标准协议或者下一代视频标准协议(如H.266等)对应的编/解码器。
参见图2，图2示出用于实现本发明实施例的编码器20的实例的示意性/概念性框图。在图2的实例中，编码器20包括残差计算单元204、变换处理单元206、量化单元208、逆量化单元210、逆变换处理单元212、重构单元214、缓冲器216、环路滤波器单元220、经解码图片缓冲器(decoded picture buffer，DPB)230、预测处理单元260和熵编码单元270。预测处理单元260可以包含帧间预测单元244、帧内预测单元254和模式选择单元262。帧间预测单元244可以包含运动估计单元和运动补偿单元(未图示)。图2所示的编码器20也可以称为混合型视频编码器或根据混合型视频编解码器的视频编码器。
例如，残差计算单元204、变换处理单元206、量化单元208、预测处理单元260和熵编码单元270形成编码器20的前向信号路径，而例如逆量化单元210、逆变换处理单元212、重构单元214、缓冲器216、环路滤波器220、经解码图片缓冲器(decoded picture buffer，DPB)230、预测处理单元260形成编码器的后向信号路径，其中编码器的后向信号路径对应于解码器的信号路径(参见图3中的解码器30)。
编码器20通过例如输入202，接收图片201或图片201的图像块203，例如，形成视频或视频序列的图片序列中的图片。图像块203也可以称为当前图片块或待编码图片块， 图片201可以称为当前图片或待编码图片(尤其是在视频编码中将当前图片与其它图片区分开时，其它图片例如同一视频序列亦即也包括当前图片的视频序列中的先前经编码和/或经解码图片)。
编码器20的实施例可以包括分割单元(图2中未绘示)，用于将图片201分割成多个例如图像块203的块，通常分割成多个不重叠的块。分割单元可以用于对视频序列中所有图片使用相同的块大小以及定义块大小的对应栅格，或用于在图片或子集或图片群组之间更改块大小，并将每个图片分割成对应的块。
在一个实例中，编码器20的预测处理单元260可以用于执行上述分割技术的任何组合。
如图片201，图像块203也是或可以视为具有采样值的采样点的二维阵列或矩阵，虽然其尺寸比图片201小。换句话说，图像块203可以包括，例如，一个采样阵列(例如黑白图片201情况下的亮度阵列)或三个采样阵列(例如，彩色图片情况下的一个亮度阵列和两个色度阵列)或依据所应用的色彩格式的任何其它数目和/或类别的阵列。图像块203的水平和垂直方向(或轴线)上采样点的数目定义图像块203的尺寸。
如图2所示的编码器20用于逐块编码图片201，例如，对每个图像块203执行编码和预测。
残差计算单元204用于基于图片图像块203和预测块265(下文提供预测块265的其它细节)计算残差块205，例如，通过逐样本(逐像素)将图片图像块203的样本值减去预测块265的样本值，以在样本域中获取残差块205。
变换处理单元206用于在残差块205的样本值上应用例如离散余弦变换(discrete cosine transform，DCT)或离散正弦变换(discrete sine transform，DST)的变换，以在变换域中获取变换系数207。变换系数207也可以称为变换残差系数，并在变换域中表示残差块205。
变换处理单元206可以用于应用DCT/DST的整数近似值，例如为HEVC/H.265指定的变换。与正交DCT变换相比，这种整数近似值通常由某一因子按比例缩放。为了维持经正变换和逆变换处理的残差块的范数，应用额外比例缩放因子作为变换过程的一部分。比例缩放因子通常是基于某些约束条件选择的，例如，比例缩放因子是用于移位运算的2的幂、变换系数的位深度、准确性和实施成本之间的权衡等。例如，在解码器30侧通过例如逆变换处理单元212为逆变换(以及在编码器20侧通过例如逆变换处理单元212为对应逆变换)指定具体比例缩放因子，以及相应地，可以在编码器20侧通过变换处理单元206为正变换指定对应比例缩放因子。
量化单元208用于例如通过应用标量量化或向量量化来量化变换系数207，以获取经量化变换系数209。经量化变换系数209也可以称为经量化残差系数209。量化过程可以减少与部分或全部变换系数207有关的位深度。例如，可在量化期间将n位变换系数向下舍入到m位变换系数，其中n大于m。可通过调整量化参数(quantization parameter，QP)修改量化程度。例如，对于标量量化，可以应用不同的标度来实现较细或较粗的量化。较小量化步长对应较细量化，而较大量化步长对应较粗量化。可以通过量化参数(quantization parameter，QP)指示合适的量化步长。例如，量化参数可以为合适的量化步长的预定义集合的索引。例如，较小的量化参数可以对应精细量化(较小量化步长)，较大量化参数可以对应粗糙量化(较大量化步长)，反之亦然。量化可以包含除以量化步长以及例如通过逆量化210执行的对应的量化或逆量化，或者可以包含乘以量化步长。根据例如HEVC的 一些标准的实施例可以使用量化参数来确定量化步长。一般而言，可以基于量化参数使用包含除法的等式的定点近似来计算量化步长。可以引入额外比例缩放因子来进行量化和反量化，以恢复可能由于在用于量化步长和量化参数的等式的定点近似中使用的标度而修改的残差块的范数。在一个实例实施方式中，可以合并逆变换和反量化的标度。或者，可以使用自定义量化表并在例如比特流中将其从编码器通过信号发送到解码器。量化是有损操作，其中量化步长越大，损耗越大。
逆量化单元210用于在经量化系数上应用量化单元208的逆量化，以获取经反量化系数211，例如，基于或使用与量化单元208相同的量化步长，应用量化单元208应用的量化方案的逆量化方案。经反量化系数211也可以称为经反量化残差系数211，对应于变换系数207，虽然由于量化造成的损耗通常与变换系数不相同。
逆变换处理单元212用于应用变换处理单元206应用的变换的逆变换，例如，逆离散余弦变换(discrete cosine transform，DCT)或逆离散正弦变换(discrete sine transform，DST)，以在样本域中获取逆变换块213。逆变换块213也可以称为逆变换经反量化块213或逆变换残差块213。
重构单元214(例如，求和器214)用于将逆变换块213(即经重构残差块213)添加至预测块265，以在样本域中获取经重构块215，例如，将经重构残差块213的样本值与预测块265的样本值相加。
可选地，例如线缓冲器216的缓冲器单元216(或简称“缓冲器”216)用于缓冲或存储经重构块215和对应的样本值，用于例如帧内预测。在其它的实施例中，编码器可以用于使用存储在缓冲器单元216中的未经滤波的经重构块和/或对应的样本值来进行任何类别的估计和/或预测，例如帧内预测。
例如，编码器20的实施例可以经配置以使得缓冲器单元216不只用于存储用于帧内预测254的经重构块215，也用于环路滤波器单元220(在图2中未示出)，和/或，例如使得缓冲器单元216和经解码图片缓冲器单元230形成一个缓冲器。其它实施例可以用于将经滤波块221和/或来自经解码图片缓冲器230的块或样本(图2中均未示出)用作帧内预测254的输入或基础。
环路滤波器单元220(或简称“环路滤波器”220)用于对经重构块215进行滤波以获取经滤波块221，从而顺利进行像素转变或提高视频质量。环路滤波器单元220旨在表示一个或多个环路滤波器，例如去块滤波器、样本自适应偏移(sample-adaptive offset，SAO)滤波器或其它滤波器，例如双边滤波器、自适应环路滤波器(adaptive loop filter，ALF)，或锐化或平滑滤波器，或协同滤波器。尽管环路滤波器单元220在图2中示出为环内滤波器，但在其它配置中，环路滤波器单元220可实施为环后滤波器。经滤波块221也可以称为经滤波的经重构块221。经解码图片缓冲器230可以在环路滤波器单元220对经重构编码块执行滤波操作之后存储经重构编码块。
编码器20(对应地，环路滤波器单元220)的实施例可以用于输出环路滤波器参数(例如，样本自适应偏移信息)，例如，直接输出或由熵编码单元270或任何其它熵编码单元熵编码后输出，例如使得解码器30可以接收并应用相同的环路滤波器参数用于解码。
经解码图片缓冲器(decoded picture buffer，DPB)230可以为存储参考图片数据供编码器20编码视频数据之用的参考图片存储器。DPB 230可由多种存储器设备中的任一个形 成，例如动态随机存储器(dynamic random access memory，DRAM)(包含同步DRAM(synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、磁阻式RAM(magnetoresistive RAM，MRAM)、电阻式RAM(resistive RAM，RRAM))或其它类型的存储器设备。可以由同一存储器设备或单独的存储器设备提供DPB 230和缓冲器216。在某一实例中，经解码图片缓冲器(decoded picture buffer，DPB)230用于存储经滤波块221。经解码图片缓冲器230可以进一步用于存储同一当前图片或例如先前经重构图片的不同图片的其它先前的经滤波块，例如先前经重构和经滤波块221，以及可以提供完整的先前经重构亦即经解码图片(和对应参考块和样本)和/或部分经重构当前图片(和对应参考块和样本)，例如用于帧间预测。在某一实例中，如果经重构块215无需环内滤波而得以重构，则经解码图片缓冲器(decoded picture buffer，DPB)230用于存储经重构块215。
预测处理单元260，也称为块预测处理单元260，用于接收或获取图像块203(当前图片201的当前图像块203)和经重构图片数据，例如来自缓冲器216的同一(当前)图片的参考样本和/或来自经解码图片缓冲器230的一个或多个先前经解码图片的参考图片数据231，以及用于处理这类数据进行预测，即提供可以为经帧间预测块245或经帧内预测块255的预测块265。
模式选择单元262可以用于选择预测模式(例如帧内或帧间预测模式)和/或对应的用作预测块265的预测块245或255，以计算残差块205和重构经重构块215。
模式选择单元262的实施例可以用于选择预测模式(例如，从预测处理单元260所支持的那些预测模式中选择)，所述预测模式提供最佳匹配或者说最小残差(最小残差意味着传输或存储中更好的压缩)，或提供最小信令开销(最小信令开销意味着传输或存储中更好的压缩)，或同时考虑或平衡以上两者。模式选择单元262可以用于基于码率失真优化(rate distortion optimization，RDO)确定预测模式，即选择提供最小码率失真优化的预测模式，或选择相关码率失真至少满足预测模式选择标准的预测模式。
下文将详细解释编码器20的实例(例如，通过预测处理单元260)执行的预测处理和(例如，通过模式选择单元262)执行的模式选择。
如上文所述，编码器20用于从(预先确定的)预测模式集合中确定或选择最好或最优的预测模式。预测模式集合可以包括例如帧内预测模式和/或帧间预测模式。
帧内预测模式集合可以包括35种不同的帧内预测模式，例如，如DC(或均值)模式和平面模式的非方向性模式，或如H.265中定义的方向性模式，或者可以包括67种不同的帧内预测模式，例如，如DC(或均值)模式和平面模式的非方向性模式，或如正在发展中的H.266中定义的方向性模式。
在可能的实现中，帧间预测模式集合取决于可用参考图片(即，例如前述存储在DBP230中的至少部分经解码图片)和其它帧间预测参数，例如取决于是否使用整个参考图片或只使用参考图片的一部分，例如围绕当前块的区域的搜索窗区域，来搜索最佳匹配参考块，和/或例如取决于是否应用如半像素和/或四分之一像素内插的像素内插，帧间预测模式集合例如可包括先进运动矢量(Advanced Motion Vector Prediction，AMVP)模式和融合(merge)模式。具体实施中，帧间预测模式集合可包括本发明实施例改进的基于控制点的AMVP模式，以及，改进的基于控制点的merge模式。在一个实例中，帧内预测单元254可以用于执行下文描述的帧间预测技术的任意组合。
除了以上预测模式，本发明实施例也可以应用跳过模式和/或直接模式。
预测处理单元260可以进一步用于将图像块203分割成较小的块分区或子块，例如，通过迭代使用四叉树(quad-tree，QT)分割、二进制树(binary-tree，BT)分割或三叉树(triple-tree，TT)分割，或其任何组合，以及用于例如为块分区或子块中的每一个执行预测，其中模式选择包括选择分割的图像块203的树结构和选择应用于块分区或子块中的每一个的预测模式。
帧间预测单元244可以包含运动估计(motion estimation，ME)单元(图2中未示出)和运动补偿(motion compensation，MC)单元(图2中未示出)。运动估计单元用于接收或获取图片图像块203(当前图片201的当前图片图像块203)和经解码图片231，或至少一个或多个先前经重构块，例如，一个或多个其它/不同先前经解码图片231的经重构块，来进行运动估计。例如，视频序列可以包括当前图片和先前经解码图片31，或换句话说，当前图片和先前经解码图片31可以是形成视频序列的图片序列的一部分，或者形成该图片序列。
例如，编码器20可以用于从多个其它图片中的同一或不同图片的多个参考块中选择参考块，并向运动估计单元(图2中未示出)提供参考图片和/或提供参考块的位置(X、Y坐标)与当前块的位置之间的偏移(空间偏移)作为帧间预测参数。该偏移也称为运动向量(motion vector，MV)。
运动补偿单元用于获取帧间预测参数，并基于或使用帧间预测参数执行帧间预测来获取帧间预测块245。由运动补偿单元(图2中未示出)执行的运动补偿可以包含基于通过运动估计(可能执行对子像素精确度的内插)确定的运动/块向量取出或生成预测块。内插滤波可从已知像素样本产生额外像素样本，从而潜在地增加可用于编码图片块的候选预测块的数目。一旦接收到用于当前图片块的PU的运动向量，运动补偿单元246可以在一个参考图片列表中定位运动向量指向的预测块。运动补偿单元246还可以生成与块和视频条带相关联的语法元素，以供解码器30在解码视频条带的图片块时使用。
具体的，上述帧间预测单元244可向熵编码单元270传输语法元素，所述语法元素包括帧间预测参数(比如遍历多个帧间预测模式后选择用于当前块预测的帧间预测模式的指示信息)。可能应用场景中，如果帧间预测模式只有一种，那么也可以不在语法元素中携带帧间预测参数，此时解码端30可直接使用默认的预测模式进行解码。可以理解的，帧间预测单元244可以用于执行帧间预测技术的任意组合。
帧内预测单元254用于获取，例如接收同一图片的图片块203(当前图片块)和一个或多个先前经重构块，例如经重构相相邻块，以进行帧内估计。例如，编码器20可以用于从多个(预定)帧内预测模式中选择帧内预测模式。
编码器20的实施例可以用于基于优化标准选择帧内预测模式，例如基于最小残差(例如，提供最类似于当前图片块203的预测块255的帧内预测模式)或最小码率失真。
帧内预测单元254进一步用于基于如所选择的帧内预测模式的帧内预测参数确定帧内预测块255。在任何情况下，在选择用于块的帧内预测模式之后，帧内预测单元254还用于向熵编码单元270提供帧内预测参数，即提供指示所选择的用于块的帧内预测模式的信息。在一个实例中，帧内预测单元254可以用于执行帧内预测技术的任意组合。
具体的，上述帧内预测单元254可向熵编码单元270传输语法元素，所述语法元素包 括帧内预测参数(比如遍历多个帧内预测模式后选择用于当前块预测的帧内预测模式的指示信息)。可能应用场景中，如果帧内预测模式只有一种，那么也可以不在语法元素中携带帧内预测参数，此时解码端30可直接使用默认的预测模式进行解码。
熵编码单元270用于将熵编码算法或方案(例如，可变长度编码(variable length coding，VLC)方案、上下文自适应VLC(context adaptive VLC，CAVLC)方案、算术编码方案、上下文自适应二进制算术编码(context adaptive binary arithmetic coding，CABAC)、基于语法的上下文自适应二进制算术编码(syntax-based context-adaptive binary arithmetic coding，SBAC)、概率区间分割熵(probability interval partitioning entropy，PIPE)编码或其它熵编码方法或技术)应用于经量化残差系数209、帧间预测参数、帧内预测参数和/或环路滤波器参数中的单个或所有上(或不应用)，以获取可以通过输出272以例如经编码比特流21的形式输出的经编码图片数据21。可以将经编码比特流传输到视频解码器30，或将其存档稍后由视频解码器30传输或检索。熵编码单元270还可用于熵编码正被编码的当前视频条带的其它语法元素。
视频编码器20的其它结构变型可用于编码视频流。例如，基于非变换的编码器20可以在没有针对某些块或帧的变换处理单元206的情况下直接量化残差信号。在另一实施方式中，编码器20可具有组合成单个单元的量化单元208和逆量化单元210。
具体的，在本发明实施例中，编码器20可用于实现后文实施例中描述的运动矢量的预测方法。
应当理解的是，视频编码器20的其它的结构变化可用于编码视频流。例如，对于某些图像块或者图像帧，视频编码器20可以直接地量化残差信号而不需要经变换处理单元206处理，相应地也不需要经逆变换处理单元212处理；或者，对于某些图像块或者图像帧，视频编码器20没有产生残差数据，相应地不需要经变换处理单元206、量化单元208、逆量化单元210和逆变换处理单元212处理；或者，视频编码器20可以将经重构图像块作为参考块直接地进行存储而不需要经滤波器220处理；或者，视频编码器20中量化单元208和逆量化单元210可以合并在一起。环路滤波器220是可选的，以及针对无损压缩编码的情况下，变换处理单元206、量化单元208、逆量化单元210和逆变换处理单元212是可选的。应当理解的是，根据不同的应用场景，帧间预测单元244和帧内预测单元254可以是被选择性的启用。
参见图3，图3示出用于实现本发明实施例的解码器30的实例的示意性/概念性框图。视频解码器30用于接收例如由编码器20编码的经编码图片数据(例如，经编码比特流)21，以获取经解码图片231。在解码过程期间，视频解码器30从视频编码器20接收视频数据，例如表示经编码视频条带的图片块的经编码视频比特流及相关联的语法元素。
在图3的实例中，解码器30包括熵解码单元304、逆量化单元310、逆变换处理单元312、重构单元314(例如求和器314)、缓冲器316、环路滤波器320、经解码图片缓冲器330以及预测处理单元360。预测处理单元360可以包含帧间预测单元344、帧内预测单元354和模式选择单元362。在一些实例中，视频解码器30可执行大体上与参照图2的视频编码器20描述的编码过程互逆的解码过程。
熵解码单元304用于对经编码图片数据21执行熵解码，以获取例如经量化系数309和/或经解码的编码参数(图3中未示出)，例如，帧间预测、帧内预测参数、环路滤波器参 数和/或其它语法元素中(经解码)的任意一个或全部。熵解码单元304进一步用于将帧间预测参数、帧内预测参数和/或其它语法元素转发至预测处理单元360。视频解码器30可接收视频条带层级和/或视频块层级的语法元素。
逆量化单元310功能上可与逆量化单元110相同，逆变换处理单元312功能上可与逆变换处理单元212相同，重构单元314功能上可与重构单元214相同，缓冲器316功能上可与缓冲器216相同，环路滤波器320功能上可与环路滤波器220相同，经解码图片缓冲器330功能上可与经解码图片缓冲器230相同。
预测处理单元360可以包括帧间预测单元344和帧内预测单元354，其中帧间预测单元344功能上可以类似于帧间预测单元244，帧内预测单元354功能上可以类似于帧内预测单元254。预测处理单元360通常用于执行块预测和/或从经编码数据21获取预测块365，以及从例如熵解码单元304(显式地或隐式地)接收或获取预测相关参数和/或关于所选择的预测模式的信息。
当视频条带经编码为经帧内编码(I)条带时，预测处理单元360的帧内预测单元354用于基于信号表示的帧内预测模式及来自当前帧或图片的先前经解码块的数据来产生用于当前视频条带的图片块的预测块365。当视频帧经编码为经帧间编码(即B或P)条带时，预测处理单元360的帧间预测单元344(例如，运动补偿单元)用于基于运动向量及从熵解码单元304接收的其它语法元素生成用于当前视频条带的视频块的预测块365。对于帧间预测，可从一个参考图片列表内的一个参考图片中产生预测块。视频解码器30可基于存储于DPB 330中的参考图片，使用默认建构技术来建构参考帧列表：列表0和列表1。
预测处理单元360用于通过解析运动向量和其它语法元素，确定用于当前视频条带的视频块的预测信息，并使用预测信息产生用于正经解码的当前视频块的预测块。在本发明的一实例中，预测处理单元360使用接收到的一些语法元素确定用于编码视频条带的视频块的预测模式(例如，帧内或帧间预测)、帧间预测条带类型(例如，B条带、P条带或GPB条带)、用于条带的参考图片列表中的一个或多个的建构信息、用于条带的每个经帧间编码视频块的运动向量、条带的每个经帧间编码视频块的帧间预测状态以及其它信息，以解码当前视频条带的视频块。在本公开的另一实例中，视频解码器30从比特流接收的语法元素包含接收自适应参数集(adaptive parameter set，APS)、序列参数集(sequence parameter set，SPS)、图片参数集(picture parameter set，PPS)或条带标头中的一个或多个中的语法元素。
逆量化单元310可用于逆量化(即，反量化)在比特流中提供且由熵解码单元304解码的经量化变换系数。逆量化过程可包含使用由视频编码器20针对视频条带中的每一视频块所计算的量化参数来确定应该应用的量化程度并同样确定应该应用的逆量化程度。
逆变换处理单元312用于将逆变换(例如，逆DCT、逆整数变换或概念上类似的逆变换过程)应用于变换系数，以便在像素域中产生残差块。
重构单元314(例如，求和器314)用于将逆变换块313(即经重构残差块313)添加到预测块365，以在样本域中获取经重构块315，例如通过将经重构残差块313的样本值与预测块365的样本值相加。
环路滤波器单元320(在编码循环期间或在编码循环之后)用于对经重构块315进行 滤波以获取经滤波块321，从而顺利进行像素转变或提高视频质量。在一个实例中，环路滤波器单元320可以用于执行下文描述的滤波技术的任意组合。环路滤波器单元320旨在表示一个或多个环路滤波器，例如去块滤波器、样本自适应偏移(sample-adaptive offset，SAO)滤波器或其它滤波器，例如双边滤波器、自适应环路滤波器(adaptive loop filter，ALF)，或锐化或平滑滤波器，或协同滤波器。尽管环路滤波器单元320在图3中示出为环内滤波器，但在其它配置中，环路滤波器单元320可实施为环后滤波器。
随后将给定帧或图片中的经解码视频块321存储在存储用于后续运动补偿的参考图片的经解码图片缓冲器330中。
解码器30用于例如，藉由输出332输出经解码图片31，以向用户呈现或供用户查看。
视频解码器30的其它变型可用于对压缩的比特流进行解码。例如，解码器30可以在没有环路滤波器单元320的情况下生成输出视频流。例如，基于非变换的解码器30可以在没有针对某些块或帧的逆变换处理单元312的情况下直接逆量化残差信号。在另一实施方式中，视频解码器30可以具有组合成单个单元的逆量化单元310和逆变换处理单元312。
具体的，在本发明实施例中，解码器30用于实现后文实施例中描述的运动矢量预测方法。
应当理解的是，视频解码器30的其它结构变化可用于解码经编码视频位流。例如，视频解码器30可以不经滤波器320处理而生成输出视频流；或者，对于某些图像块或者图像帧，视频解码器30的熵解码单元304没有解码出经量化的系数，相应地不需要经逆量化单元310和逆变换处理单元312处理。环路滤波器320是可选的；以及针对无损压缩的情况下，逆量化单元310和逆变换处理单元312是可选的。应当理解的是，根据不同的应用场景，帧间预测单元和帧内预测单元可以是被选择性的启用。
应当理解的是，本申请的编码器20和解码器30中，针对某个环节的处理结果可以经过进一步处理后，输出到下一个环节，例如，在插值滤波、运动矢量推导或环路滤波等环节之后，对相应环节的处理结果进一步进行Clip或移位shift等操作。
例如，按照相邻仿射编码块的运动矢量推导得到的当前图像块的控制点的运动矢量，或者推导得到的当前图像块的子块的运动矢量，可以经过进一步处理，本申请对此不做限定。例如，对运动矢量的取值范围进行约束，使其在一定的位宽内。假设允许的运动矢量的位宽为bitDepth，则运动矢量的范围为-2^(bitDepth-1)～2^(bitDepth-1)-1，其中“^”符号表示幂次方。如bitDepth为16，则取值范围为-32768～32767。如bitDepth为18，则取值范围为-131072～131071。又例如，对运动矢量(例如一个8x8图像块内的四个4x4子块的运动矢量MV)的取值进行约束，使得所述四个4x4子块MV的整数部分之间的最大差值不超过N个像素，例如不超过一个像素。
可以通过以下两种方式进行约束，使其在一定的位宽内：
方式1，将运动矢量溢出的高位去除：
ux＝(vx+2 bitDepth)％2 bitDepth
vx＝(ux>＝2 bitDepth-1)？(ux-2 bitDepth):ux
uy＝(vy+2 bitDepth)％2 bitDepth
vy＝(uy>＝2 bitDepth-1)？(uy-2 bitDepth):uy
其中，vx为图像块或所述图像块的子块的运动矢量的水平分量，vy为图像块或所述图像块的子块的运动矢量的垂直分量，ux和uy为中间值；bitDepth表示位宽。
例如vx的值为-32769，通过以上公式得到的为32767。因为在计算机中，数值是以二进制的补码形式存储的，-32769的二进制补码为1,0111,1111,1111,1111(17位)，计算机对于溢出的处理为丢弃高位，则vx的值为0111,1111,1111,1111，则为32767，与通过公式处理得到的结果一致。
方法2，将运动矢量进行Clipping，如以下公式所示：
vx＝Clip3(-2 bitDepth-1,2 bitDepth-1-1,vx)
vy＝Clip3(-2 bitDepth-1,2 bitDepth-1-1,vy)
其中vx为图像块或所述图像块的子块的运动矢量的水平分量，vy为图像块或所述图像块的子块的运动矢量的垂直分量；其中，x、y和z分别对应MV钳位过程Clip3的三个输入值，所述Clip3的定义为，表示将z的值钳位到区间[x,y]之间：
Figure PCTCN2019100751-appb-000001
参见图4，图4是本发明实施例提供的视频译码设备400(例如视频编码设备400或视频解码设备400)的结构示意图。视频译码设备400适于实施本文所描述的实施例。在一个实施例中，视频译码设备400可以是视频解码器(例如图1A的解码器30)或视频编码器(例如图1A的编码器20)。在另一个实施例中，视频译码设备400可以是上述图1A的解码器30或图1A的编码器20中的一个或多个组件。
视频译码设备400包括：用于接收数据的入口端口410和接收单元(Rx)420，用于处理数据的处理器、逻辑单元或中央处理器(CPU)430，用于传输数据的发射器单元(Tx)440和出口端口450，以及，用于存储数据的存储器460。视频译码设备400还可以包括与入口端口410、接收器单元420、发射器单元440和出口端口450耦合的光电转换组件和电光(EO)组件，用于光信号或电信号的出口或入口。
处理器430通过硬件和软件实现。处理器430可以实现为一个或多个CPU芯片、核(例如，多核处理器)、FPGA、ASIC和DSP。处理器430与入口端口410、接收器单元420、发射器单元440、出口端口450和存储器460通信。处理器430包括译码模块470(例如编码模块470或解码模块470)。编码/解码模块470实现本文中所公开的实施例，以实现本发明实施例所提供的色度块预测方法。例如，编码/解码模块470实现、处理或提供各种编码操作。因此，通过编码/解码模块470为视频译码设备400的功能提供了实质性的改进，并影响了视频译码设备400到不同状态的转换。或者，以存储在存储器460中并由处理器430执行的指令来实现编码/解码模块470。
存储器460包括一个或多个磁盘、磁带机和固态硬盘，可以用作溢出数据存储设备，用于在选择性地执行这些程序时存储程序，并存储在程序执行过程中读取的指令和数据。存储器460可以是易失性和/或非易失性的，可以是只读存储器(ROM)、随机存取存储器(RAM)、随机存取存储器(ternary content-addressable memory，TCAM)和/或静态随机 存取存储器(SRAM)。
参见图5，图5是根据一示例性实施例的可用作图1A中的源设备12和目的地设备14中的任一个或两个的装置500的简化框图。装置500可以实现本申请的技术。换言之，图5为本申请实施例的编码设备或解码设备(简称为译码设备500)的一种实现方式的示意性框图。其中，译码设备500可以包括处理器510、存储器530和总线系统550。其中，处理器和存储器通过总线系统相连，该存储器用于存储指令，该处理器用于执行该存储器存储的指令。译码设备的存储器存储程序代码，且处理器可以调用存储器中存储的程序代码执行本申请描述的各种视频编码或解码方法，尤其是各种新的帧间预测的方法。为避免重复，这里不再详细描述。
在本申请实施例中，该处理器510可以是中央处理单元(Central Processing Unit，简称为“CPU”)，该处理器510还可以是其他通用处理器、数字信号处理器(DSP)、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现成可编程门阵列(FPGA)或者其他可编程逻辑器件、分立门或者晶体管逻辑器件、分立硬件组件等。通用处理器可以是微处理器或者该处理器也可以是任何常规的处理器等。
该存储器530可以包括只读存储器(ROM)设备或者随机存取存储器(RAM)设备。任何其他适宜类型的存储设备也可以用作存储器530。存储器530可以包括由处理器510使用总线550访问的代码和数据531。存储器530可以进一步包括操作系统533和应用程序535，该应用程序535包括允许处理器510执行本申请描述的视频编码或解码方法(尤其是本申请描述的运动矢量的预测方法)的至少一个程序。例如，应用程序535可以包括应用1至N，其进一步包括执行在本申请描述的视频编码或解码方法的视频编码或解码应用(简称视频译码应用)。
该总线系统550除包括数据总线之外，还可以包括电源总线、控制总线和状态信号总线等。但是为了清楚说明起见，在图中将各种总线都标为总线系统550。
可选的，译码设备500还可以包括一个或多个输出设备，诸如显示器570。在一个示例中，显示器570可以是触感显示器，其将显示器与可操作地感测触摸输入的触感单元合并。显示器570可以经由总线550连接到处理器510。
图4和图5所示的装置或设备均可以用于执行本申请实施例中的方法。
如前所述，帧间预测是视频编解码系统的一个重要组成部分。
HEVC引入了两种帧间预测模式，分别为先进的运动矢量预测(Advanced Motion Vector Prediction，AMVP)模式和融合(Merge)模式。
对于AMVP模式，先通过当前编码单元空域或者时域相邻的已编码单元的运动信息，构建候选运动矢量列表，然后从候选运动矢量列表中确定最优的运动矢量作为当前编码单元的运动矢量预测值(Motion vector predictor，MVP)。率失真代价由公式(1)计算获得，其中J为率失真代价(RD Cost)，SAD为使用候选运动矢量预测值进行运动估计后得到的预测像素值与原始像素值之间的绝对误差和(Sum of Absolute Differences，SAD)，R为码率，λ为拉格朗日乘子，编码端将基于率失真代价选择的运动矢量预测值在候选运动矢量列表中的索引值以及参考帧索引值传递到解码端。进一步地，在以MVP为中心的邻域内进行运动搜索获得当前编码单元实际的运动矢量，编码端将MVP与实际运动矢量之间的差值(Motion vector difference，MVD)传递到解码端。
J＝SAD+λR          (1)
对于Merge模式，先通过当前编码单元空域或者时域相邻的已编码单元的运动信息，构建候选运动信息列表，然后通过率失真代价从候选运动信息列表中确定最优的运动信息作为当前编码单元的运动信息，再将最优的运动信息在候选运动信息列表中位置的索引值(记为merge index，下同)传递到解码端。当前编码单元空域和时域候选运动信息如图6所示，空域候选运动信息来自于空间相邻的5个块(A0,A1,B0,B1和B2)，若相邻块不可得或者为帧内编码模式或者帧内块复制模式，则不加入候选运动信息列表。当前编码单元的时域候选运动信息根据参考帧和当前帧的图序计数(Picture order count，POC)对参考帧中对应位置块的MV进行缩放后获得。其中，对应位置块的确定包括首先判断参考帧中位置为T的块是否可得，若不可得则选择位置在C的块作为对应位置块。
在HEVC的帧间预测中，基于编码单元内的所有像素的运动信息都相同的假设进行运动补偿，以得到编码单元的像素的预测值。然而在编码单元内，并非所有的像素一定具有相同的运动特性，因此，采用相同的运动信息对CU内所有的像素进行预测，可能会降低运动补偿的准确性，进而增加了残差信息。
为了进一步提高编码效率，在一些可行的实施方式中，将编码单元划分为至少两个子编码单元，然后推导得到每个子编码单元的运动信息，根据子编码单元的运动信息进行运动补偿，从而提高了预测的准确性，例如，子编码单元运动矢量预测(Sub-CU based motion vector prediction，SMVP)技术。
SMVP将当前编码单元划分为大小为MxN的子编码单元，并推导出每个子编码单元的运动信息，然后利用各个子编码单元的运动信息进行运动补偿，得到当前编码单元的预测值。
基于SMVP技术，在Merge模式的候选预测运动信息列表中增加了一种或两种候选运动信息，即高级时域运动矢量预测(Advanced temporal motion vector prediction，ATMVP)和、或空域时域运动矢量预测(Spatial-temporal motion vector prediction，STMVP)。对应的，该候选预测运动信息列表也称为子块融合候选列表(sub-block based merging candidate list)。
在一些可行的实施方式中，子块融合候选列表中包括ATMVP预测模式、基于仿射模型的预测模式(包括利用继承的控制点运动矢量预测方法和/或利用构造的控制点运动矢量预测方法)、基于帧间平面预测模式(PLANAR)中的一种或多种。
如图7所示，ATMVP技术先确定对应位置参考帧(Collocated reference picture)，然后将当前编码单元划分为MxN的子编码单元，获取当前每一个子编码单元在对应位置参考帧中对应的子编码单元中心点位置像素的运动信息，并将其进行缩放，转换为当前每一个子编码单元的运动信息，ATMVP也称为基于子块的时域运动矢量预测(subblock-based temporal motion vector prediction，SbTMVP)。
STMVP技术通过获取每一个子编码单元的上边空域、左边空域和右下角时域相邻位置的运动信息，求其平均值，并转化为当前每一个子编码单元的运动信息。如图8所示，当前编码单元划分为A、B、C、D四个子编码单元。以A为例，利用空域相邻位置c、b和对应位置参考帧中D位置的运动信息推导得到子编码单元A的运动信息。
采用SMVP技术后，在Merge模式的候选运动信息列表中增加了ATMVP和STMVP 候选运动信息，此时Merge模式的编码过程变为：
1)按照顺序获得空域相邻的A1，B1，B0，A0位置的运动信息，检查各位置运动信息的可用性，可选的可以剔除重复项，将可用的未被剔除的运动信息插入候选运动信息列表；
2)通过ATMVP和STMVP技术获得对应的运动信息，检查可用性及剔除重复项，检查获得的运动信息的可用性，可选的可以剔除重复项，将可用的未被剔除的运动信息插入候选运动信息列表；
3)当候选运动信息列表的长度小于6时，获得B2位置的运动信息，检查其可用性，可选的剔除重复项，如果其可用且未被剔除，将其插入候选运动信息列表；
4)获得相邻已编码帧中T位置对应块的运动信息(若不存在，则获得C位置对应块的运动信息)，基于该相邻已编码帧和当前帧的POC关系进行缩放，将缩放处理后的运动信息插入候选运动信息列表；
5)若候选运动信息列表长度小于7，则填充运动信息，以得到长度为7的候选运动信息列表，其中，填充的运动信息可以为0或者其它约先约定获取方式的运动信息，不做限定。
6)遍历候选运动信息列表中的每个候选运动信息，进行运动补偿和重建，以得到重建值，再根据率失真优化(Rate distortion optimization，RDO)方法决策出率失真代价(Rate distortion cost,RD cost)最小的候选运动信息，得到RD cost最小的候选运动信息对应的merge index；
7)根据候选运动信息列表的长度，将merge index写入码流，传递给解码端。
利用ATMVP技术对当前待处理图像进行帧间预测的过程主要包括：确定当前待处理图像中的当前待处理块的偏移运动矢量；根据当前待处理块中的待处理子块的位置以及上述偏移运动矢量，在对应的参考图像中确定待处理子块的对应子块；根据对应子块的运动矢量，确定当前待处理子块的运动矢量；根据待处理子块的运动矢量对待处理子块进行运动补偿预测，得到待处理子块的预测像素值。
具体的，如图9所示，在一种可行的实施方式中，包括：
S901、获得偏移运动矢量(offset motion vector)。
偏移运动矢量用于确定当前CU(即当前待处理CU，或者也可称为待处理块、待编码块、待解码块等)中的预设位置点在对应图像(collocated picture)中的对应点的位置。偏移运动矢量可以采用当前CU的空域相邻块的运动矢量。当前CU所在帧的对应图像，可以通过解析码流获得，也可以为预设值(该预设值在编解码端的取值相同)。示例性的，不妨设对应图像为当前CU的参考帧列表中参考帧索引为0的图像。在一些可行的实施方式中，也可以根据偏移运动矢量及对应图像块，确定当前CU在对应图像块中的位置，处于该位置的块可称为对应块(corresponding/collocated block)。
示例性的，偏移运动矢量可以通过以下任意一种方法获得。
方法一：判断图6中A1的运动矢量是否可得。应理解，可得是指该运动矢量存在、可以获得，示例性的，当该相邻块不存在，或者该相邻块和当前块不在同一编码区域内(比如条带(slice)，片(tile)，片组(tile group)等)，或者该相邻块采用帧内预测模式或帧内块复制模式(intra block copy，IBC)，则该相邻块的运动矢量不可得。反之，该相邻块采 用帧间预测模式，或者，该相邻块采用帧间预测模式且和当前块在同一编码区域内，则该相邻块的运动矢量可得。
其中，对于帧内块复制模式，在HEVC的扩展标准屏幕内容编码标准(screen content coding，SCC)中采纳了帧内块复制的编码工具，主要用于提高屏幕内容视频的编码效率。IBC模式是一种块级的编码模式，在编码端，使用块匹配的方法为每个CU找到最佳的块矢量或者运动矢量。此处的运动矢量主要用来表示当前块到参考块的位移，也称为位移矢量(displacement vector)，该参考块为当前图像内的已重建块。IBC模式可以认为是除帧内预测或者帧间预测模式之外的第三种预测模式。为了节省存储空间和减小解码器的复杂度，在一些实施方式中的IBC模式只允许使用当前CTU的预定义区域的重建部分进行预测。
当A1不可得时，可以使用零运动矢量作为当前CU的偏移运动矢量。
不妨设A1可以具有基于第一参考帧列表list0的第一向运动矢量和基于第二参考帧列表list1的第二向运动矢量。
当A1可得时，如果A1满足以下(1)-(5)所有条件，将A1的基于list1的第二向运动矢量作为当前CU的偏移运动矢量，条件包括：
(1)A1采用了list1中的参考帧进行预测；
(2)被用于预测的A1的list1中的参考帧和当前CU所在图像帧的对应图像相同；
示例性的，可以判断list1中的参考帧的POC和当前CU所在图像帧的对应图像的POC是否相同，其中，表征对应图像的信息可以从码流中解析获得。
(3)使用低延迟编码结构，即待编码/解码/处理图像的参考帧的显示顺序均在待编码/解码/处理图像之前；
(4)当前CU所在图像的图像类型为B图像，或者当前CU所在片为B片，或者当前CU所在片组(tile group)为B片组；
(5)当前CU所在图像的对应图像从list1获取，示例性的，语法元素collocated_from_l0_flag的取值为0。
否则，即当A1可得但至少一个上述条件不满足时，如果A1满足以下(6)和(7)条件时，将A1的基于list0的第一向运动矢量作为当前CU的偏移运动矢量，条件包括：
(6)A1采用了list0中的参考帧进行预测；
(7)被用于预测的A1的list0中的参考帧和当前CU所在图像帧的对应图像相同。
方法二：按照图6中A1，B1，B0，A0的顺序，找到第一个可得的相邻块的运动矢量。如果该相邻块的参考帧为当前CU所在帧的对应图像，即该找到的运动矢量指向对应图像，则将该相邻块的运动矢量作为当前CU的偏移运动矢量。否则，即如果该相邻块的参考帧不为当前CU所在帧的对应图像，在一种可行的实施方式中，可以使用零运动矢量作为当前CU的偏移运动矢量。在另一种可行的实施方式中，对第一个可得的相邻块的运动矢量，基于对应图像的POC、当前CU所在图像的POC，第一个可得的相邻块的参考帧的POC，进行缩放，使缩放后的运动矢量指向对应图像，将缩放后的运动矢量作为当前CU的偏移运动矢量。具体的缩放方法可以参见现有技术中时域运动矢量的获取方法，或者本实施例中步骤1005中的缩放方法，不再赘述。
应理解，当偏移运动矢量为零运动矢量时，对应图像中与当前CU处于相同位置的图像块即为当前CU在对应图像中的对应块。
当通过上述方法无法获得满足条件的当前CU的偏移运动矢量时，不采用ATMVP的预测模式来获取当前CU的子块的运动矢量。
S902、根据偏移运动矢量，判断ATMVP模式是否可用。
具体的，不妨设，当前CU预设位置点在对应图像中的对应点所在的图像块为S子块，其坐标位置为(x col，y col)，示例性的，
Figure PCTCN2019100751-appb-000002
(x,y)为当前CU的左上顶点的坐标，W为当前CU的宽度，H为当前CU的高度，(x off,y off)为偏移运动矢量。
当S子块的预测模式为帧内预测模式或帧内块复制模式时，确定ATMVP模式不可用，停止执行步骤902以及后续步骤。
当S子块的预测模式为帧间预测模式时，确定ATMVP模式可用，进一步地，获取S子块的运动信息，即坐标位置(x col，y col)处对应的运动信息，确定为初始默认运动矢量。
将初始默认运动矢量MV进行缩放，得到待处理子块的默认运动矢量MVs。
示例性的，如图10所示，MVs可以通过公式(3)获得：
Figure PCTCN2019100751-appb-000003
其中，CurPoc为当前CU所在帧的POC，ColPoc为对应图像的POC，CurRefPoc为当前CU的参考帧的POC，ColRefPoc为子块S的参考帧的POC。
应理解，MV包括水平方向的运动矢量MVx和竖直方向的运动矢量MVy，可以分别按照上述公式计算，分别获得缩放后的水平方向的运动矢量MVsx和缩放后的竖直方向的运动矢量MVsy。
S903、根据对应子块的运动信息，确定待处理子块的运动信息。
示例性的，如图11所示，待处理块，即当前CU，位于当前图像中，待处理块包含4个子块，一个待处理子块为待处理块的左上子块，那么，在确定这个待处理子块的对应子块时，可以将对应图像中左上位置的子块确定为这个待处理子块的对应子块。应理解，不同的对应子块可以作为一个整体以对应块的形式存在，也可以以单独子块的形式存在。
示例性的，可以获取对应子块的几何中心的位置对应的运动信息。具体的，当前CU的第(i，j)个待处理子块(即从左到右第i个且从上到下第j个子块)的对应子块的中心位置(x (i,j),y (i,j))可以根据公式(4)获得
Figure PCTCN2019100751-appb-000004
其中，(x，y)表示当前CU的左上顶点的坐标，M表示待处理子块的宽，H表示待处理子块的高。
判断该中心位置所在图像块的预测模式。
当该图像块的预测模式为帧间预测模式时，该中心位置处的运动矢量可得，获取该位 置的运动矢量。基于待处理子块所在的图像帧和对应子块所在图像帧的时域关系，对该运动矢量进行缩放处理，得到该待处理子块的运动矢量。缩放处理的方法和公式(2)类似，示例性的，
Figure PCTCN2019100751-appb-000005
其中，MV为上述中心位置处的运动矢量，MV R为待处理子块的运动矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，当前CU的参考帧的POC CurRefPoc可以预设为在当前CU所在帧的参考图像列表中参考帧索引为0的参考帧的POC。
应理解，CurRefPoc还可以为当前CU所在帧的参考图像列表中的其它参考帧，不作限定。
当该图像块的预测模式为帧内预测模式或帧内块复制模式时，该中心位置处的运动矢量不可得，采用步骤S902中确定的待处理子块的默认运动矢量MVs作为该待处理子块的运动矢量。
S904、基于当前CU的子块的运动信息，进行运动补偿，得到当前CU的预测像素值。
对于每一个子块，基于步骤903中确定的运动矢量以及当前CU所在图像的参考帧，例如，运动矢量MV R和参考帧CurRefPoc，进行运动补偿，得到该子块的预测像素值。运动补偿的过程可以参见前文描述，或者现有技术中的任何改进方案，不做赘述。
由于当前CU是由各个子块构成的，因此当每一个子块都依上述方式得到了各自的预测像素值之后，当前CU的预测像素值也就得到了。
该实施方式通过获得每一个子块的运动矢量，能够反映待处理块内部更复杂的运动情况，提高了运动矢量的准确性，进而提高了编码效率，但是由于当对应子块运动信息不可得时，需要计算默认运动信息，影响编解码速度。
如图12所示，在另一种可行的实施方式中，待处理块包括一个或多个子块，待处理块的对应图像的标识信息从码流中解析获得。当待处理块的预设位置的一个空域相邻块的运动矢量可得且该运动矢量对应的参考帧为对应图像时，将该运动矢量确定为时域偏移矢量。基于该时域偏移矢量在对应图像中确定待处理块的子块的对应子块的位置。判断对应子块的运动矢量是否可得，基于对应子块的运动矢量确定待处理块的子块的运动矢量。该帧间预测方法具体为：
S1201、根据所述待处理块的空域相邻块，确定所述待处理块的时域偏移矢量。
其中，所述时域偏移矢量用于确定所述待处理块的子块的对应子块。
应理解，示例性的，如图11所示，待处理块包括4个待处理子块，每个待处理块的子块根据其在当前图像中的位置以及时域偏移矢量(图中标识为偏移运动矢量)，在对应图像(图中表示为目标图像，即对应子块所在的图像)中确定对应子块。
其中，对应子块所在的图像帧(对应图像)在所述待处理块的空域相邻块的参考帧列表中的索引通过解析码流获取，即，在解码端可以通过解析码流中相应的信息确定对应图像，在编码端可以通过RDO选择的方式确定性能最优的图像帧为对应图像，或者指定某一帧为对应图像，并将对应图像的指示信息写码流。或者，对应图像也可以根据编解码端预先协议设定。
在一种可行的实施方式中，步骤1201可以具体为：
按照预设顺序依次检查多个第一预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量是否可得，直到获取所述预设顺序中第一个运动矢量可得的空域相邻块的运动矢量；
将所述预设顺序中第一个运动矢量可得的空域相邻块的运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
当所述多个第一预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量均不可得时，将第二预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
示例性的，如图6所示，可以对待处理块的空域相邻块A1，B1，B0，A0依次检查其运动矢量是否可得，直到发现第一个运动矢量可得的空域相邻块，不妨设为B0，停止检查，将B0的运动矢量作为时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，还可以基于B0的参考帧，待处理块所在的图像帧，待处理块的对应图像之间的时域关系，对B0的运动矢量进行缩放处理，以使缩放后的运动矢量以对应图像为参考帧。
如果所有的空域相邻块的运动矢量都不可得，可以将第二预设运动矢量，不妨设为零运动矢量，作为时域偏移矢量。
应理解，第一预设位置的空域相邻块为编解码端预先协议设定或者根据更高层语法元素确定，本申请实施例不做限定。
所述空域相邻块的运动矢量不可得的条件包括下列一项或多项的组合：所述空域相邻块未编码/解码(如果预测方法实施在编码端则空域相邻块未编码，如果实施在解码端则空域相邻块未解码)；或者，所述空域相邻块采用帧内预测或帧内块复制模式；或者，所述空域相邻块不存在；或者，所述空域相邻块和所述待处理块位于不同的编码区域。
示例性的，所述编码区域包括：图像、条带(slice)、片(tile)或片组(tile group)。
在另一种可行的实施方式中，步骤1201还可以具体为：
获取第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量和参考帧，其中，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量可得；
将所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
当所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量不可得时，将第三预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一些可行的实施方式中，第二预设位置的空域相邻块还满足其参考帧和对应图像所在的图像相同。
示例性的，如图6所示，不妨设第二预设位置的空域相邻块为A1。
应理解，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量包括基于所述第一参考帧列表的第一向运动矢量，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的参考帧包括所述第一向运动矢量对应的第一向参考帧。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述将所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量，具体为：当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同时，将所述第三预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
示例性的，第三预设运动矢量为零运动矢量。
应理解，当所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块采用双向预测时，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量还包括基于所述第二参考帧列表的第二向运动矢量，所述第二预设位 置的空域相邻块的参考帧包括所述第二向运动矢量对应的第二向参考帧。
在另一种可行的实施方式中，所述将所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量，具体为：当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同时，判断所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧是否相同；当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同时，将所述第三预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。可选的，在判断所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧是否相同之前，还包括：判断空域相邻块所处的编码区域是否为B类型，即是否为B帧，B片，B条带或B片组等。
在另一种可行的实施方式中，当所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块采用双向预测时，所述将所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量，具体为：当所述对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第二参考帧列表中获取时，判断所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧是否相同；当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第一参考帧列表中获取时，判断所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧是否相同；当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。此外，当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同时，将所述第三预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在另一种可行的实施方式中，当所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块采用双向预测时，所述将所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量，具体为：当所述对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第二参考帧列表中获取且所述待处理块的参考帧列表中的全部参考帧的显示顺序均在所述待处理块所在的图像帧之前时，判断所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧是否相同；当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第一参考帧列表中获取或所述待处理块的参考帧列表中的至少一个参考帧的显示顺序在所述待处理块所在的图像帧之后时，所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧是否相同；当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。此外，当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同时，将所述第三预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
示例性的，对应子块所在的图像帧是否从所述第一/第二参考帧列表中获取，可以根据 解析码流中的语法元素collocated_from_l0_flag获得。具体的，当collocated_from_l0_flag取值为1时表示对应子块所在的图像帧(对应图像)从所述第一参考帧列表中获取，取值为0时表示对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第二参考帧列表中获取。当码流中不携带collocated_from_l0_flag的信息时，默认对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第一参考帧列表中获取。
示例性的，所述待处理块的参考帧列表中的全部参考帧的显示顺序均在所述待处理块所在的图像帧之前，即采用低延迟的编码帧结构，在此编码结构下，在编码每一帧图像时，采用的参考帧均为显示顺序位于当前待编码帧之前。对应的，在解码端，采用的参考帧均为显示顺序位于当前待解码帧之前。
应理解，当相邻空域块所在的编码区域不为B类型时，相邻空域块不会采用双向预测，涉及双向预测的实施方式可能无法得到良好的技术效果，因此，可选的，可以在执行上述涉及双向预测的实施方式前，判断空域相邻块所处的编码区域是否为B类型。
S1202、判断所述对应子块的预设块内位置对应的运动矢量是否可得。
可以根据待处理块中的一个子块(不妨称为示例子块)的位置坐标和步骤S1201中确定的时域偏移矢量，在对应图像中确定该子块的对应子块的位置。示例性的，可以采用本文公式(4)的方式获得对应子块的位置。具体的，结合公式(4)，x和y分别表示待处理块的左上顶点的横、纵坐标，i，j表示该示例子块是排列在待处理块中的，从左到右第i个且从上到下第j个的子块，x off和y off分别表示时域偏移矢量的横、纵坐标，M和N分别表示子块的宽和高，x (i,j)和y (i,j)分别表示示例子块的对应子块(不妨简称为对应子块)的位置坐标。
应理解，公式(4)中的M/2和N/2表示了预设块内位置为对应子块的几何中心位置。预设块内位置还可以为对应子块的左上顶点等块内其他位置，不作限定。
对应子块的预设块内位置对应的运动矢量，也可以作为对应子块的运动矢量。
基于上述位置坐标(x (i,j),y (i,j))，可以确定该位置坐标所在的对应图像中的预测单元，并根据该预测单元的预测信息确定对应子块的预设块内位置对应的运动矢量是否可得。
应理解，该预测单元为对应图像实际编码后的结果，可能与对应子块不一致。
示例性的，当该预测单元的预测模式为帧间预测时，所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量可得，当该预测单元的预测模式为帧内预测或帧内块复制模式时，所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量不可得。
在一种可行的实施方式中，可以考察预测单元的预测模式信息，根据预测模式信息确定该预测单元的预测模式为帧内预测，帧间预测或者帧内块复制模式等其它模式。
在另一种可行的实施方式中，可以考察预测单元的运动信息，例如可以考察预测方向，当预测方向标识predFlagL0和/或predFlagL1为1时为帧间预测，否则为帧内预测模式或其他运动矢量不可得的预测模式。
S1203、根据所述对应子块的运动矢量，确定所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量。
其中，当所述对应子块的运动矢量不可得时，根据第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量。
当该预测单元的预测模式为帧间预测时，所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量可得，根据所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量。
具体的，可以基于第一时域距离差和第二时域距离差的比值，对所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量进行缩放处理，以获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量，其中，所述第一时域距离差为所述待处理块所在的图像帧与所述待处理块的参考帧的图序计数差，所述第二时域距离差为所述对应子块所在的图像帧与所述对应子块的参考帧的图序计数差。缩放处理的具体计算流程，示例性的，可以参见本文中的公式(3)，不再赘述。
其中，所述待处理块的参考帧在所述待处理块的参考帧列表中的索引通过解析码流获取，即，在解码端可以通过解析码流中相应的信息确定待处理块的参考帧，在编码端可以通过RDO选择的方式确定性能最优的图像帧为待处理块的参考帧，或者指定某一帧为待处理块的参考帧，并将待处理块的参考帧的指示信息写码流。或者，待处理块的参考帧也可以根据编解码端预先协议设定。示例性的，所述待处理块的参考帧在所述待处理块的参考帧列表中的索引为0。
应理解，当预设块内位置对应的运动矢量可能从位置对应的运动矢量存储单元中直接获取，也可能从相邻位置的运动矢量存储单元中获取，还可能根据相邻位置的运动矢量存储单元中的运动矢量插值滤波获得，不作限定。
当该预测单元的预测模式为帧内预测或帧内块复制模式时，所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量不可得，根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述子块的运动矢量包括基于第一参考帧列表的第一向子块运动矢量和/或基于第二参考帧列表的第二向子块运动矢量，所述当所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量不可得时，根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量，具体为：确定所述待处理块的子块采用基于所述第一向子块运动矢量的单向预测，且根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的第一向子块运动矢量；或者，确定所述待处理块的子块采用基于所述第二向子块运动矢量的单向预测，且根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的第二向子块运动矢量。
在另一种可行的实施方式中，所述子块的运动矢量包括基于第一参考帧列表的第一向子块运动矢量和基于第二参考帧列表的第二向子块运动矢量，所述当所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量不可得时，根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量，具体为：当所述待处理块所在的编码区域的预测类型为B型预测时，确定所述待处理块的子块采用双向预测，且根据所述第一预设运动矢量分别获取所述待处理块的子块的第一向子块运动矢量和所述待处理块的子块的第二向子块运动矢量；当所述待处理块所在的编码区域的预测类型为P型预测时，确定所述待处理块的子块采用单向预测，且根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的第一向子块运动矢量。
示例性的，所述编码区域包括：图像、条带、片或片组。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述根据第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量，包括：将所述第一预设运动矢量作为所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述第一预设运动矢量为零运动矢量。
示例性的，可以设置采用第一向预测的标志predFlagL0为1，第二向预测的标志predFlagL1为0，第一向子块运动矢量mvL0为(0，0)；
或者，可以设置采用第一向预测的标志predFlagL0为0，第二向预测的标志predFlagL1为1，第二向子块运动矢量mvL1为(0，0)；
或者，当示例子块所在的编码区域为B帧或B条带或B片或B片组时，可以设置采用第一向预测的标志predFlagL0为1，第二向预测的标志predFlagL1为1，第一向子块运动 矢量mvL0为(0，0)，第二向子块运动矢量mvL1为(0，0)；否则(当示例子块所在的编码区域不对应上述双向预测区域时)，可以设置采用第一向预测的标志predFlagL0为1，第二向预测的标志predFlagL1为0，第一向子块运动矢量mvL0为(0，0)。
S1204、基于所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量和所述待处理块的参考帧，对所述待处理块的子块进行运动补偿，以获取所述待处理块的子块的预测值。
应理解，对于待处理块中的每一个子块，都按照上述处理示例子块的处理流程进行，可以得到每一个子块的预测值。由于待处理块是由各个子块构成的，每个子块的预测值确定以后，待处理块的预测值相应的同时确定。
在本实施例中，提供了几种简化的时域偏移矢量的获取方法，在保证对应子块获取准确度的同时，简化了计算复杂度。同时，简化了在对应子块不可得时，对应的待处理块的子块的运动矢量的确定方式，进一步简化了计算复杂度。
如图13所示，待处理块包括一个或多个子块，一种帧间预测装置1300，包括：
偏移获取模块1301，用于根据所述待处理块的空域相邻块，确定所述待处理块的时域偏移矢量，所述时域偏移矢量用于确定所述待处理块的子块的对应子块；运动矢量获取模块1302，用于根据所述对应子块的运动矢量，确定所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量，其中，当所述对应子块的运动矢量不可得时，根据第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述偏移获取模块1301具体用于：按照预设顺序依次检查多个第一预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量是否可得，直到获取所述预设顺序中第一个运动矢量可得的空域相邻块的运动矢量；将所述预设顺序中第一个运动矢量可得的空域相邻块的运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述偏移获取模块1301具体用于：当所述多个第一预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量均不可得时，将第二预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述第二预设运动矢量为零运动矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述偏移获取模块1301具体用于：获取第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量和参考帧，其中，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量可得；将所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述偏移获取模块1301具体用于：当所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量不可得时，将第三预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述第三预设运动矢量为零运动矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量包括基于所述第一参考帧列表的第一向运动矢量，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的参考帧包括所述第一向运动矢量对应的第一向参考帧，所述偏移获取模块1301具体用于：当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同时，所述偏移获取模块1301具体用于：将所述第三预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，当所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块采用双向预测时，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量还包括基于所述第二参考帧列表的第二向运动矢量，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的参考帧包括所述第二向运动矢量对应的第二向参考 帧，当所述第一向参考帧和所述待处理块的时域对应块所在的图像帧不同时，所述偏移获取模块1301具体用于：当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同时，将所述第三预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，当所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块采用双向预测时，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量包括基于所述第一参考帧列表的第一向运动矢量和基于所述第二参考帧列表的第二向运动矢量，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的参考帧包括所述第一向运动矢量对应的第一向参考帧和所述第二向运动矢量对应的第二向参考帧，所述偏移获取模块1301具体用于：当所述对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第二参考帧列表中获取时：当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第一参考帧列表中获取时：当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述偏移获取模块1301具体用于：当所述对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第二参考帧列表中获取且所述待处理块的参考帧列表中的全部参考帧的显示顺序均在所述待处理块所在的图像帧之前时：当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第一参考帧列表中获取或所述待处理块的参考帧列表中的至少一个参考帧的显示顺序在所述待处理块所在的图像帧之后时：当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同时，所述偏移获取模块1301具体用于：将所述第三预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述对应子块所在的图像帧在所述待处理块的空域相邻块的参考帧列表中的索引通过解析所述码流获取。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述空域相邻块的运动矢量不可得的条件包括下列一项或多项的组合：所述空域相邻块未编码/解码；或者，所述空域相邻块采用帧内预测或帧内块复制模式；或者，所述空域相邻块不存在；或者，所述空域相邻块和所述待处理块位于不同的编码区域。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述编码区域包括：图像、条带、片或片组。
在一种可行的实施方式中，还包括：判断模块1303，用于判断所述对应子块的预设块内位置对应的运动矢量是否可得；对应的，所述运动矢量获取模块1302具体用于：当所 述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量可得时，根据所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量；当所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量不可得时，根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述预设块内位置为所述对应子块的几何中心位置。
在一种可行的实施方式中，当所述预设块内位置所在的预测单元采用帧内预测或帧内块复制模式时，所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量不可得；当所述预设块内位置所在的预测单元采用帧间预测时，所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量可得。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述运动矢量获取模块1302具体用于：将所述第一预设运动矢量作为所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述第一预设运动矢量为零运动矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述子块的运动矢量包括基于第一参考帧列表的第一向子块运动矢量和/或基于第二参考帧列表的第二向子块运动矢量，当所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量不可得时，所述运动矢量获取模块1302具体用于：确定所述待处理块的子块采用基于所述第一向子块运动矢量的单向预测，且根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的第一向子块运动矢量；或者，确定所述待处理块的子块采用基于所述第二向子块运动矢量的单向预测，且根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的第二向子块运动矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，当所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量不可得时，所述运动矢量获取模块1302具体用于：当所述待处理块所在的编码区域的预测类型为B型预测时，确定所述待处理块的子块采用双向预测，且根据所述第一预设运动矢量分别获取所述待处理块的子块的第一向子块运动矢量和所述待处理块的子块的第二向子块运动矢量；当所述待处理块所在的编码区域的预测类型为P型预测时，确定所述待处理块的子块采用单向预测，且根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的第一向子块运动矢量。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述运动矢量获取模块1302具体用于：基于第一时域距离差和第二时域距离差的比值，对所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量进行缩放处理，以获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量，其中，所述第一时域距离差为所述待处理块所在的图像帧与所述待处理块的参考帧的图序计数差，所述第二时域距离差为所述对应子块所在的图像帧与所述对应子块的参考帧的图序计数差。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述待处理块的参考帧在所述待处理块的参考帧列表中的索引通过解析码流获取。
在一种可行的实施方式中，所述待处理块的参考帧在所述待处理块的参考帧列表中的索引为0。
在一种可行的实施方式中，还包括：运动补偿模块1304，用于基于所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量和所述待处理块的参考帧，对所述待处理块的子块进行运动补偿，以获取所述待处理块的子块的预测值。
应理解，图13所示的本申请实施例中的各个模块用于执行图12所示的方法以及各可行的实施方式，具有相同的技术效果。
下面示例性的介绍一些与本申请实施例相关的实现方式。
在实施例A中：
步骤1：确认偏移运动矢量(offset motion vector)
偏移运动矢量(offset motion vector)用于确定当前CU在对应图像(collocated picture)中的对应块的位置，偏移运动矢量可以使用当前CU的空域相邻块的运动矢量。根据偏移运动矢量及当前帧的对应图像，确定当前CU在对应图像中的位置，称为对应块(corresponding/collocated block)。所述获取偏移运动矢量可以是以下方法中的一种：
方法一：在一种实现方式中，如图6所示，如果A1可得，则根据以下方法确定偏移运动矢量。
如果A1不可得，偏移运动矢量取值为0。A1不可得是指，A1位置的块未解码，或这不是帧间预测块(为帧内预测块或帧内块复制模式Intra block copy，IBC)，或者这个块在当前条(slice)、片、条组(tile group)或图像以外，就认为它是不可用块。帧内块复制模式也可称为帧内块拷贝模式。
如果满足以下所有条件，则当前块的偏移运动矢量为A1的list1对应的运动矢量
A1使用了list1进行预测
A1使用list1预测的参考帧与当前帧的对应图像(collocated picture)相同。(通过判断POC是否相同。参考帧idx和对应图像的idx对应的POC号相同，当前块的对应图像的idx可以从码流中获取)
使用低延迟编码结构，即只使用显示顺序位于当前图像之前的图像进行预测。
当前块所在的图像类型或片类型或tile group类型为B
collocated_from_l0_flag为0，其中，collocated_from_l0_flag为1是指进行时域运动矢量预测的同位图像从参考图像队列list0获取。为0，是指进行时域运动矢量预测的同位图像从参考图像队列list1获取。不出现在码流中时，值为1。
否则，如果满足以下所有条件，则偏移运动矢量为A1的list0对应的运动矢量。
A1使用了list0进行预测
A1使用list0进行预测的参考帧与当前帧的collocated picture相同。
方法二：如按照图6中A1，B1，B0，A0的顺序，找到第一个可得的相邻块的运动矢量，若其指向对应图像，则将其作为当前CU的偏移运动矢量。否则，可以使用零运动矢量，或者将其进行缩放，使其指向对应图像，作为当前CU的偏移运动矢量。
应当理解的是，采用的偏移矢量还可以是零偏移矢量，此时，对应图像中与待处理块处于相同位置的图像块为待处理块在对应图像中的对应块。另外，在寻找不到满足要求的目标偏移矢量时，也可以不采用ATMVP技术，而是采用其它技术来获取待处理子块的运动矢量。
步骤2：获得ATMVP的可获得性信息和默认运动信息
可以先根据偏移矢量得到对应块，获得对应块中预设位置所在的对应子块S的预测模式，其预设位置的坐标(xcol，ycol)可以按照公式(6)得到。根据对应子块S的预测模式和运动信息获得ATMVP的默认运动信息和可获得性。具体方法如下：
即：先在对应块中确定一个预设位置坐标，得到预设位置的子块的预测模式，根据预设位置对应子块S的预测模式确定当前ATMVP是否可用。
Figure PCTCN2019100751-appb-000006
其中，(x,y)表示当前CU的左上顶点的坐标，(x off,y off)表示偏移运动矢量，W表示当前CU宽度，H表示当前CU高度。
若预设位置对应子块S的预测模式为帧内预测模式或帧内块拷贝模式，则ATMVP运动信息为不可得。
若预设位置对应子块S的预测模式为帧间预测模式，则进一步提取该对应子块S的运动信息，按照公式(6)，获取预设位置的坐标，进而将对应图像的运动矢量场中该位置的运动信息作为对应子块的S运动信息，该对应子块S的运动信息称为对应子块的默认运动信息。
将对应子块S的默认运动矢量MV进行缩放，得到待处理子块的默认运动矢量MVs，缩放后的运动矢量MVs作为默认运动信息。
例如，如图10所示，可以使用公式(7)方法，得到缩放后的MVs。缩放方法在此不做具体限定。
Figure PCTCN2019100751-appb-000007
其中，设当前块所在帧的POC号为CurPoc，当前块的参考帧的POC号为CurRefPoc，对应图像的POC号为ColPoc，对应子块的参考帧的POC号为ColRefPoc，待缩放的运动矢量为MV。
可选地，MV分解为水平方向的运动矢量MVx和竖直方向的运动矢量MVy，分别按照上述公式计算，分别获得水平方向的运动矢量MVsx和竖直方向的运动矢量MVsy。
(应当理解的是，所述预设位置对应子块S只有一个，取该对应子块S的作用是，根据对应子块S的预测模式判断ATMVP是否可用。)
步骤3：根据对应子块的运动信息确定待处理子块的运动信息
如图11所示，对于当前CU中的每一个子块，根据偏移运动矢量及子块的位置坐标，确定子块在对应图像的对应子块，获取该对应子块的运动信息。
按照公式(8)，获取对应子块中心点的位置坐标，其中(x,y)表示当前CU的左上顶点的坐标，i表示从左到右数的第i个子块，j表示从上到下数的第j个子块，(x off,y off)表示偏移运动矢量，MxN为子块的尺寸(如4x4,8x8等)，(x (i,j),y (i,j))表示第(i,j)个对应子块的位置坐标。
Figure PCTCN2019100751-appb-000008
根据对应子块中心位置坐标，获取对应子块的预测模式，如果对应子块的预测模式是帧间预测，对应子块的运动信息的运动信息可得，则将对应图像的运动矢量场中该位置的运动信息作为对应子块的运动信息。将对应子块的运动信息进行缩放，得到待处理子块的运动信息。缩放方法同步骤2中的方法，在此不再赘述。
如果对应子块的预测模式是帧内预测或帧内块拷贝模式，则对应子块的运动信息不可得，此时可以使用步骤2得到的默认运动信息作为该对应子块的运动信息。
步骤4：根据每个子块的运动信息，进行运动补偿预测，得到当前CU的预测像素值
根据每个子块的运动信息，将子块左上角像素点的坐标加上运动矢量，找到在参考帧中的对应的坐标点。如果运动矢量为分像素精度，则需要进行插值滤波得到子块的预测像素值；否则，直接获取参考帧中的像素值作为子块的预测像素值。
判断ATMVP可获得性信息需要引入偏移运动矢量，导致依赖于偏移运动矢量查找过程，且当对应子块运动信息不可得时，需要计算默认运动信息，影响编解码速度。
在实施例B中：
步骤1：确认偏移运动矢量(offset motion vector)
偏移运动矢量(offset motion vector)用于确定当前CU在对应图像中的对应块的位置，偏移运动矢量可以使用当前CU的空域相邻块的运动矢量。将该空域相邻块的参考帧，作为当前CU的对应图像(collocated picture)。根据偏移运动矢量及对应图像块，确定当前CU在对应图像块中的位置，称为对应块(corresponding/collocated block)。
具体方法与实施例A的步骤1相同。
步骤2：获取对应子块的运动信息
如图11所示，可以先根据偏移矢量得到对应块，然后再根据待处理子块的位置在目标图像中确定与待处理子块具有相对位置关系的对应子块(也可以理解为在对应块中确定与待处理子块具有相对位置关系的对应子块)。
对于当前CU中的每一个子块，根据偏移运动矢量及子块的位置坐标，确定子块在对应图像的对应子块，获取该对应子块的运动信息。
按照公式(9)，获取对应子块中心点的位置坐标，其中(x,y)表示当前CU的左上顶点的坐标，i表示从左到右数的第i个子块，j表示从上到下数的第j个子块，(x off,y off)表示偏移运动矢量，MxN为子块的尺寸(如4x4,8x8等)，(x (i,j),y (i,j))表示第(i,j)个对应子块的位置坐标
Figure PCTCN2019100751-appb-000009
根据对应子块中心位置坐标，获取对应子块的预测模式，如果对应子块的预测模式是帧间预测，对应子块的运动信息的运动信息可得，则将对应图像的运动矢量场中该位置的运动信息作为对应子块的运动信息。根据对应子块的运动信息推导得到当前子块的运动信息。将对应子块的运动矢量进行缩放，转换为子块的运动矢量。缩放方法可以使用现有技术中的缩放方法，在此不再赘述。
如果对应子块的预测模式是帧内预测或帧内块拷贝模式，则对应子块的运动信息不可得，此时可以使用以下处理方法中的一种：
方法一：如果当前CU的子块所在的图像类型或slice类型或tile group类型为B，对应子块或者待处理子块填充双向零运动矢量，例如，predFlagL0＝1，predFlagL1＝1，mvL0＝0，mvL1＝0。
否则，填充单向list0运动矢量，例如，predFlagL0＝1，predFlagL1＝0，mvL0＝0，mvL1＝0。
方法二：对应子块或待处理子块填充单向list0零运动矢量信息，例如，predFlagL0＝1，predFlagL1＝0，mvL0＝0，mvL1＝0。
方法三：对应子块或者待处理子块填充单向list1零运动矢量信息，例如，predFlagL0＝0，predFlagL1＝1，mvL0＝0，mvL1＝0。
其中，predFlagL0和predFlagL1分别表示使用list0和list1进行预测的预测方向，mvL0和mvL1分别表示使用list0和list1进行预测使用的运动矢量，mvL0＝0表示mvL0的水平和竖直分量均填充为0，mvL1＝0表示mvL1的水平和竖直分量均为0。
步骤3：根据每个子块的运动信息，进行运动补偿预测，得到当前CU的预测像素值
根据每个子块的运动信息，将子块左上角像素点的坐标加上运动矢量，找到在参考帧中的对应的坐标点。如果运动矢量为分像素精度，则需要进行插值滤波得到子块的预测像素值；否则，直接获取参考帧中的像素值作为子块的预测像素值。
附文本修改：(文本的修改基础可以参见JVET-N1001-v3，下述伪代码的含义可以参见该文本，该文本可从网站 http://phenix.int-evry.fr/jvet/中下载获得)
–When availableFlagL0SbCol and availableFlagL1SbCol are both equal to 0,the following applies::
mvL0SbCol[xSbIdx][ySbIdx][0]＝0                                                (8-638)
mvL0SbCol[xSbIdx][ySbIdx][1]＝0                                                (8-638)
predFlagL0SbCol[xSbIdx][ySbIdx]＝1       (8-639)
mvL1SbCol[xSbIdx][ySbIdx][0]＝0                                                (8-638)
mvL1SbCol[xSbIdx][ySbIdx][1]＝0                                                (8-638)
predFlagL1SbCol[xSbIdx][ySbIdx]＝slice_type＝＝B？1:0                                (8-639)
mvL0SbCol[xSbIdx][ySbIdx][0]＝0                                                (8-638)
mvL0SbCol[xSbIdx][ySbIdx][1]＝0                                                (8-638)
predFlagL0SbCol[xSbIdx][ySbIdx]＝1       (8-639)
mvL1SbCol[xSbIdx][ySbIdx][0]＝0                                                (8-638)
mvL1SbCol[xSbIdx][ySbIdx][1]＝0                                                (8-638)
predFlagL1SbCol[xSbIdx][ySbIdx]＝0      (8-639)
本申请实施例在对应子块的运动信息不可得时，解决了现有技术中需要复杂的起始偏移运动矢量计算，直接填充预设运动信息，以确定ATMVP的可获得性信息和默认运动信息的问题，减少编解码的复杂度。
在实施例C中：
本实施例涉及一种帧间预测方法，对获取偏移运动矢量的方法进行了优化，步骤2，步骤3与实施例A相同，具体描述如下：
步骤1：确认偏移运动矢量(offset motion vector)
偏移运动矢量(offset motion vector)用于确定当前CU在对应图像中的对应块的位置，偏移运动矢量可以使用当前CU的空域相邻块的运动矢量。将该空域相邻块的参考帧，作为当前CU的对应图像(collocated picture)。根据偏移运动矢量及对应图像块，确定当前CU在对应图像块中的位置，称为对应块(corresponding/collocated block)。
如图10所示，如果A1可得，且A1的运动矢量指向的对应图像为其同位图像(即A1的参考图像为其同位帧)，则将A1的运动矢量作为当前CU的偏移运动矢量，所述获取偏移运动矢量可以是以下方法中的一种。如果A1不可得，偏移运动矢量取值为0。A1不可得是指，A1位置的块是未解码，或者为帧内预测块或帧内块拷贝模式，或者这个块在当前条(slice)、片、条组(tile group)或图像以外，就认为它是不可用块。
方法一：判断是否均满足以下预设条件，如果均满足预设条件：检测A1的list1对应的参考帧是否与当前帧的对应图像相同，如果相同，则使用list1对应的运动矢量作为偏移运动矢量，如果不同，则检测list0对应的参考帧与当前帧的对应图像是否相同，如果相同，则使用list0对应的运动矢量作为偏移运动矢量，否则，偏移运动矢量为0。
1)使用低延迟编码结构，即只使用显示顺序位于当前图像之前的图像进行预测。
2)当前块所在的图像类型或片类型或tile group类型为B。
3)collocated_from_l0_flag为0，其中，collocated_from_l0_flag为1是指进行时域运动矢量预测的同位图像从参考图像队列list0获取。为0，是指进行时域运动矢量预测的同位图像从参考图像队列list1获取。不出现在码流中时，值为1。
否则(不满足上述预设条件)，先检测A1的list0对应的参考帧是否与当前帧的对应图像相同，如果相同，则使用list0对应的运动矢量作为偏移运动矢量；如果不同，则检测list1对应的参考帧与当前帧的对应图像是否相同，如果相同，则使用list1对应的运动矢量作为偏移运动矢量，否则，偏移运动矢量为0。
方法二：判断是否均满足以下预设条件，如果均满足预设条件：检测A1的list1对应的参考帧是否与当前帧的对应图像相同，如果相同，则使用list1对应的运动矢量作为偏移运动矢量，如果不同，则检测list0对应的参考帧与当前帧的对应图像是否相同，如果相同，则使用list0对应的运动矢量作为偏移运动矢量，否则，偏移运动矢量为0。
1)当前块所在的图像类型或片类型或tile group类型为B
2)collocated_from_l0_flag为0，其中，collocated_from_l0_flag为1是指进行时域运动矢量预测的同位图像从参考图像队列list0获取。为0，是指进行时域运动矢量预测的同位图像从参考图像队列list1获取。不出现在码流中时，值为1。
否则(不满足上述预设条件)，先检测A1的list0对应的参考帧是否与当前帧的对应图像相同，如果相同，则使用list0对应的运动矢量作为偏移运动矢量；如果不同，则检测list1对应的参考帧与当前帧的对应图像是否相同，如果相同，则使用list1对应的运动矢量作为偏移运动矢量，否则，偏移运动矢量为0。
方法三：首先检查A1的list0对应的参考帧和当前帧的对应图像是否相同，如果相同，则使用A1的list0对应的运动矢量作为偏移运动矢量，无需再检查list1对应的参考帧是否与当前帧的对应图像是否相同。如果A1的list0对应的参考帧和当前帧的对应图像不相同，且当前块所在图像类型或片类型或tile group类型为B，则还需判断list1的参考帧与当前帧的对应图像是否相同，如果是，则可使用A1的list1对应的运动矢量作为偏移运动矢量， 否则，偏移运动矢量为0。
方法四：检查A1的list0对应的参考帧和当前帧的对应图像是否相同，如果相同，则使用A1的list0对应的运动矢量作为偏移运动矢量，否则，偏移运动矢量为0。
其中，图像块的当前帧的对应图像的索引号(idx)可以从码流中获取。
应当理解的是，采用的偏移矢量还可以是零偏移矢量，此时，对应图像中与待处理块处于相同位置的图像块为待处理块在对应图像中的对应块。另外，在寻找不到满足要求的目标偏移矢量时，也可以不采用ATMVP技术，而是采用其它技术来获取待处理子块的运动矢量。
附文本修改如下：
方法一：
When availableFlagA 1is equal to TRUE,the following applies:
–If all of the following conditions are true,checkL1First is set equal to 1:
–DiffPicOrderCnt(aPic,currPic)is less than or equal to 0 for every picture aPic in every reference picture list of the current slice,
–slice_type is equal to B,
–collocated_from_l0_flag is equal to 0.
–K is set equal to checkL1First,and if all of the following conditions are true,tempMV is set equal to mvLKA 1:
–predFlagLKA 1is equal to 1,
–DiffPicOrderCnt(ColPic,RefPicList[K][refIdxLKA 1])is equal to 0.
–Othewise,K is set equal to(1–checkL1First),and if all of the following conditions are true,tempMV is set equal to mvLKA 1:
–predFlagLKA 1is equal to 1,
–DiffPicOrderCnt(ColPic,RefPicList[K][refIdxLKA 1])is equal to 0.
方法二：
When availableFlagA 1is equal to TRUE,the following applies:
–If all of the following conditions are true,checkL1First is set equal to 1:
–slice_type is equal to B,
–collocated_from_l0_flag is equal to 0.
–K is set equal to checkL1First,and if all of the following conditions are true,tempMV is set equal to mvLKA 1:
–predFlagLKA 1is equal to 1,
–DiffPicOrderCnt(ColPic,RefPicList[K][refIdxLKA 1])is equal to 0.
–Othewise,K is set equal to(1–checkL1First),and if all of the following conditions aretrue,tempMV is set equal to mvLKA 1:
–predFlagLKA 1is equal to 1,
–DiffPicOrderCnt(ColPic,RefPicList[K][refIdxLKA 1])is equal to 0.
方法三：
When availableFlagA 1is equal to TRUE,the following applies:
–If all of the following conditions are true,tempMV is set equal to mvL0A 1:
–predFlagL0A 1is equal to 1,
–DiffPicOrderCnt(ColPic,RefPicList[0][refIdxL0A 1])is equal to 0.
–Othewise,if all of the following conditions are true,tempMV is set equal to mvL1A 1:
–slice_type is equal to B,
–predFlagL1A 1is equal to 1,
–DiffPicOrderCnt(ColPic,RefPicList[1][refIdxL1A 1])is equal to 0.
方法四：
When availableFlagA 1is equal to TRUE,the following applies:
–If all of the following conditions are true,tempMV is set equal to mvL0A 1:
–predFlagL0A 1is equal to 1,
–DiffPicOrderCnt(ColPic,RefPicList[0][refIdxL0A 1])is equal to 0.
本申请实施例提供了一种新的偏移运动矢量的计算方法，提高了编解码效率的同时，减小编解码的复杂度。
本领域技术人员能够领会，结合本文公开描述的各种说明性逻辑框、模块和算法步骤所描述的功能可以硬件、软件、固件或其任何组合来实施。如果以软件来实施，那么各种说明性逻辑框、模块、和步骤描述的功能可作为一或多个指令或代码在计算机可读媒体上存储或传输，且由基于硬件的处理单元执行。计算机可读媒体可包含计算机可读存储媒体，其对应于有形媒体，例如数据存储媒体，或包括任何促进将计算机程序从一处传送到另一处的媒体(例如，根据通信协议)的通信媒体。以此方式，计算机可读媒体大体上可对应于(1)非暂时性的有形计算机可读存储媒体，或(2)通信媒体，例如信号或载波。数据存储媒体可为可由一或多个计算机或一或多个处理器存取以检索用于实施本申请中描述的技术的指令、代码和/或数据结构的任何可用媒体。计算机程序产品可包含计算机可读媒体。
作为实例而非限制，此类计算机可读存储媒体可包括RAM、ROM、EEPROM、CD-ROM或其它光盘存储装置、磁盘存储装置或其它磁性存储装置、快闪存储器或可用来存储指令或数据结构的形式的所要程序代码并且可由计算机存取的任何其它媒体。并且，任何连接被恰当地称作计算机可读媒体。举例来说，如果使用同轴缆线、光纤缆线、双绞线、数字订户线(DSL)或例如红外线、无线电和微波等无线技术从网站、服务器或其它远程源传输指令，那么同轴缆线、光纤缆线、双绞线、DSL或例如红外线、无线电和微波等无线技术包含在媒体的定义中。但是，应理解，所述计算机可读存储媒体和数据存储媒体并不包括连接、载波、信号或其它暂时媒体，而是实际上针对于非暂时性有形存储媒体。如本文中所使用，磁盘和光盘包含压缩光盘(CD)、激光光盘、光学光盘、数字多功能光盘(DVD)和蓝光光盘，其中磁盘通常以磁性方式再现数据，而光盘利用激光以光学方式再现数据。以上各项的组合也应包含在计算机可读媒体的范围内。
可通过例如一或多个数字信号处理器(DSP)、通用微处理器、专用集成电路(ASIC)、现场可编程逻辑阵列(FPGA)或其它等效集成或离散逻辑电路等一或多个处理器来执行指令。因此，如本文中所使用的术语“处理器”可指前述结构或适合于实施本文中所描述的技术的任一其它结构中的任一者。另外，在一些方面中，本文中所描述的各种说明性逻辑框、模块、和步骤所描述的功能可以提供于经配置以用于编码和解码的专用硬件和/或软件模块内，或者并入在组合编解码器中。而且，所述技术可完全实施于一或多个电路或逻辑元件中。
本申请的技术可在各种各样的装置或设备中实施，包含无线手持机、集成电路(IC)或一组IC(例如，芯片组)。本申请中描述各种组件、模块或单元是为了强调用于执行所揭示的技术的装置的功能方面，但未必需要由不同硬件单元实现。实际上，如上文所描述，各种单元可结合合适的软件和/或固件组合在编码解码器硬件单元中，或者通过互操作硬件单元(包含如上文所描述的一或多个处理器)来提供。
在上述实施例中，对各个实施例的描述各有侧重，某个实施例中没有详述的部分，可以参见其他实施例的相关描述。
以上所述，仅为本申请示例性的具体实施方式，但本申请的保护范围并不局限于此，任何熟悉本技术领域的技术人员在本申请揭露的技术范围内，可轻易想到的变化或替换，都应涵盖在本申请的保护范围之内。因此，本申请的保护范围应该以权利要求的保护范围为准。

Claims (68)

  1. 一种帧间预测方法，其特征在于，待处理块包括一个或多个子块，所述方法包括：
    根据所述待处理块的空域相邻块，确定所述待处理块的时域偏移矢量，所述时域偏移矢量用于确定所述待处理块的子块的对应子块；
    根据所述对应子块的运动矢量，确定所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量，其中，当所述对应子块的运动矢量不可得时，根据第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量。
  2. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述待处理块的空域相邻块，确定所述待处理块的时域偏移矢量，包括：
    按照预设顺序依次检查多个第一预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量是否可得，直到获取所述预设顺序中第一个运动矢量可得的空域相邻块的运动矢量；
    将所述预设顺序中第一个运动矢量可得的空域相邻块的运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
  3. 根据权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，当所述多个第一预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量均不可得时，将第二预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
  4. 根据权利要求3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二预设运动矢量为零运动矢量。
  5. 根据权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述待处理块的空域相邻块，确定所述待处理块的时域偏移矢量，包括：
    获取第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量和参考帧，其中，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量可得；
    将所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
  6. 根据权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，当所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量不可得时，将第三预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
  7. 根据权利要求6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第三预设运动矢量为零运动矢量。
  8. 根据权利要求5至7任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量包括基于所述第一参考帧列表的第一向运动矢量，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的参考帧包括所述第一向运动矢量对应的第一向参考帧，所述将所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量，包括：
    当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
  9. 根据权利要求8所述的方法，其特征在于，当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同时，包括：
    将所述第三预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
  10. 根据权利要求8所述的方法，其特征在于，当所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块采用双向预测时，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量还包括基于所述第二参考帧列表的第二向运动矢量，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的参考帧包括所述第二向运动矢量 对应的第二向参考帧，当所述第一向参考帧和所述待处理块的时域对应块所在的图像帧不同时，包括：
    当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；
    当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同时，将所述第三预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
  11. 根据权利要求5至7任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，当所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块采用双向预测时，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量包括基于所述第一参考帧列表的第一向运动矢量和基于所述第二参考帧列表的第二向运动矢量，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的参考帧包括所述第一向运动矢量对应的第一向参考帧和所述第二向运动矢量对应的第二向参考帧，所述将所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量，包括：
    当所述对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第二参考帧列表中获取时：
    当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；
    当所述对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第一参考帧列表中获取时：
    当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
  12. 根据权利要求11所述的方法，其特征在于，所述将所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量，包括：
    当所述对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第二参考帧列表中获取且所述待处理块的参考帧列表中的全部参考帧的显示顺序均在所述待处理块所在的图像帧之前时：
    当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；
    当所述对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第一参考帧列表中获取或所述待处理块的参考帧列表中的至少一个参考帧的显示顺序在所述待处理块所在的图像帧之后时：
    当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
  13. 根据权利要求11或12所述的方法，其特征在于，当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同时，将所述第三预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
  14. 根据权利要求8至13任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述对应子块所在的图像帧在所述待处理块的空域相邻块的参考帧列表中的索引通过解析所述码流获取。
  15. 根据权利要求2至14任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述空域相邻块的运动矢量不可得的条件包括下列一项或多项的组合：
    所述空域相邻块未编码/解码；或者，
    所述空域相邻块采用帧内预测或帧内块复制模式；或者，
    所述空域相邻块不存在；或者，
    所述空域相邻块和所述待处理块位于不同的编码区域。
  16. 根据权利要求15所述的方法，其特征在于，所述编码区域包括：图像、条带、片或片组。
  17. 根据权利要求1至16任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述确定所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量之前，还包括：
    判断所述对应子块的预设块内位置对应的运动矢量是否可得；
    对应的，所述确定所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量，包括：
    当所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量可得时，根据所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量；
    当所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量不可得时，根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量。
  18. 根据权利要求17所述的方法，其特征在于，所述预设块内位置为所述对应子块的几何中心位置。
  19. 根据权利要求17或18所述的方法，其特征在于，当所述预设块内位置所在的预测单元采用帧内预测或帧内块复制模式时，所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量不可得；当所述预设块内位置所在的预测单元采用帧间预测时，所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量可得。
  20. 根据权利要求17至19任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量，包括：
    将所述第一预设运动矢量作为所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量。
  21. 根据权利要求1至20任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一预设运动矢量为零运动矢量。
  22. 根据权利要求17至21任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述子块的运动矢量包括基于第一参考帧列表的第一向子块运动矢量和/或基于第二参考帧列表的第二向子块运动矢量，当所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量不可得时，所述根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量，包括：
    确定所述待处理块的子块采用基于所述第一向子块运动矢量的单向预测，且根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的第一向子块运动矢量；
    或者，确定所述待处理块的子块采用基于所述第二向子块运动矢量的单向预测，且根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的第二向子块运动矢量。
  23. 根据权利要求22所述的方法，其特征在于，当所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量不可得时，所述根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量，包括：
    当所述待处理块所在的编码区域的预测类型为B型预测时，确定所述待处理块的子块 采用双向预测，且根据所述第一预设运动矢量分别获取所述待处理块的子块的第一向子块运动矢量和所述待处理块的子块的第二向子块运动矢量；
    当所述待处理块所在的编码区域的预测类型为P型预测时，确定所述待处理块的子块采用单向预测，且根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的第一向子块运动矢量。
  24. 根据权利要求17至23任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述根据所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量，包括：
    基于第一时域距离差和第二时域距离差的比值，对所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量进行缩放处理，以获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量，其中，所述第一时域距离差为所述待处理块所在的图像帧与所述待处理块的参考帧的图序计数差，所述第二时域距离差为所述对应子块所在的图像帧与所述对应子块的参考帧的图序计数差。
  25. 根据权利要求24所述的方法，其特征在于，所述待处理块的参考帧在所述待处理块的参考帧列表中的索引通过解析码流获取。
  26. 根据权利要求24或25所述的方法，其特征在于，所述待处理块的参考帧在所述待处理块的参考帧列表中的索引为0。
  27. 根据权利要求1至26任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：
    基于所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量和所述待处理块的参考帧，对所述待处理块的子块进行运动补偿，以获取所述待处理块的子块的预测值。
  28. 一种帧间预测装置，其特征在于，待处理块包括一个或多个子块，所述装置包括：
    偏移获取模块，用于根据所述待处理块的空域相邻块，确定所述待处理块的时域偏移矢量，所述时域偏移矢量用于确定所述待处理块的子块的对应子块；
    运动矢量获取模块，用于根据所述对应子块的运动矢量，确定所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量，其中，当所述对应子块的运动矢量不可得时，根据第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量。
  29. 根据权利要求28所述的装置，其特征在于，所述偏移获取模块具体用于：
    按照预设顺序依次检查多个第一预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量是否可得，直到获取所述预设顺序中第一个运动矢量可得的空域相邻块的运动矢量；
    将所述预设顺序中第一个运动矢量可得的空域相邻块的运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
  30. 根据权利要求29所述的装置，其特征在于，所述偏移获取模块具体用于：当所述多个第一预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量均不可得时，将第二预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
  31. 根据权利要求30所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第二预设运动矢量为零运动矢量。
  32. 根据权利要求28所述的装置，其特征在于，所述偏移获取模块具体用于：
    获取第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量和参考帧，其中，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量可得；
    将所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
  33. 根据权利要求32所述的装置，其特征在于，所述偏移获取模块具体用于：当所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量不可得时，将第三预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
  34. 根据权利要求33所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第三预设运动矢量为零运动矢量。
  35. 根据权利要求32至34任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量包括基于所述第一参考帧列表的第一向运动矢量，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的参考帧包括所述第一向运动矢量对应的第一向参考帧，所述偏移获取模块具体用于：当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
  36. 根据权利要求35所述的装置，其特征在于，当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同时，所述偏移获取模块具体用于：
    将所述第三预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
  37. 根据权利要求35所述的装置，其特征在于，当所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块采用双向预测时，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量还包括基于所述第二参考帧列表的第二向运动矢量，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的参考帧包括所述第二向运动矢量对应的第二向参考帧，当所述第一向参考帧和所述待处理块的时域对应块所在的图像帧不同时，所述偏移获取模块具体用于：
    当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；
    当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同时，将所述第三预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
  38. 根据权利要求32至34任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，当所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块采用双向预测时，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的运动矢量包括基于所述第一参考帧列表的第一向运动矢量和基于所述第二参考帧列表的第二向运动矢量，所述第二预设位置的空域相邻块的参考帧包括所述第一向运动矢量对应的第一向参考帧和所述第二向运动矢量对应的第二向参考帧，所述偏移获取模块具体用于：
    当所述对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第二参考帧列表中获取时：
    当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；
    当所述对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第一参考帧列表中获取时：
    当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
  39. 根据权利要求38所述的装置，其特征在于，所述偏移获取模块具体用于：
    当所述对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第二参考帧列表中获取且所述待处理块的参考帧列表中的全部参考帧的显示顺序均在所述待处理块所在的图像帧之前时：
    当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；
    当所述对应子块所在的图像帧从所述第一参考帧列表中获取或所述待处理块的参考帧列表中的至少一个参考帧的显示顺序在所述待处理块所在的图像帧之后时：
    当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第一向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量；当所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧相同时，将所述第二向运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
  40. 根据权利要求38或39所述的装置，其特征在于，当所述第二向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同且所述第一向参考帧和所述对应子块所在的图像帧不同时，所述偏移获取模块具体用于：将所述第三预设运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
  41. 根据权利要求37至40任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述对应子块所在的图像帧在所述待处理块的空域相邻块的参考帧列表中的索引通过解析所述码流获取。
  42. 根据权利要求29至41任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述空域相邻块的运动矢量不可得的条件包括下列一项或多项的组合：
    所述空域相邻块未编码/解码；或者，
    所述空域相邻块采用帧内预测或帧内块复制模式；或者，
    所述空域相邻块不存在；或者，
    所述空域相邻块和所述待处理块位于不同的编码区域。
  43. 根据权利要求42所述的装置，其特征在于，所述编码区域包括：图像、条带、片或片组。
  44. 根据权利要求28至43任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，还包括：
    判断模块，用于判断所述对应子块的预设块内位置对应的运动矢量是否可得；
    对应的，所述运动矢量获取模块具体用于：
    当所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量可得时，根据所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量；
    当所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量不可得时，根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量。
  45. 根据权利要求44所述的装置，其特征在于，所述预设块内位置为所述对应子块的几何中心位置。
  46. 根据权利要求44或45所述的装置，其特征在于，当所述预设块内位置所在的预测单元采用帧内预测或帧内块复制模式时，所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量不可得；当所述预设块内位置所在的预测单元采用帧间预测时，所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量可得。
  47. 根据权利要求44至46任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述运动矢量获取模块具体用于：
    将所述第一预设运动矢量作为所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量。
  48. 根据权利要求28至47任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一预设运动矢量为零运动矢量。
  49. 根据权利要求44至48任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述子块的运动矢量包括基于第一参考帧列表的第一向子块运动矢量和/或基于第二参考帧列表的第二向子块运动矢量，当所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量不可得时，所述运动矢量获取模块具体用于：
    确定所述待处理块的子块采用基于所述第一向子块运动矢量的单向预测，且根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的第一向子块运动矢量；
    或者，确定所述待处理块的子块采用基于所述第二向子块运动矢量的单向预测，且根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的第二向子块运动矢量。
  50. 根据权利要求49所述的装置，其特征在于，当所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量不可得时，所述运动矢量获取模块具体用于：
    当所述待处理块所在的编码区域的预测类型为B型预测时，确定所述待处理块的子块采用双向预测，且根据所述第一预设运动矢量分别获取所述待处理块的子块的第一向子块运动矢量和所述待处理块的子块的第二向子块运动矢量；
    当所述待处理块所在的编码区域的预测类型为P型预测时，确定所述待处理块的子块采用单向预测，且根据所述第一预设运动矢量获取所述待处理块的子块的第一向子块运动矢量。
  51. 根据权利要求44至50任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述运动矢量获取模块具体用于：
    基于第一时域距离差和第二时域距离差的比值，对所述预设块内位置对应的运动矢量进行缩放处理，以获取所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量，其中，所述第一时域距离差为所述待处理块所在的图像帧与所述待处理块的参考帧的图序计数差，所述第二时域距离差为所述对应子块所在的图像帧与所述对应子块的参考帧的图序计数差。
  52. 根据权利要求51所述的装置，其特征在于，所述待处理块的参考帧在所述待处理块的参考帧列表中的索引通过解析码流获取。
  53. 根据权利要求51或52所述的装置，其特征在于，所述待处理块的参考帧在所述待处理块的参考帧列表中的索引为0。
  54. 根据权利要求28至53任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，还包括：
    运动补偿模块，用于基于所述待处理块的子块的运动矢量和所述待处理块的参考帧，对所述待处理块的子块进行运动补偿，以获取所述待处理块的子块的预测值。
  55. 一种视频编码器，其特征在于，所述视频编码器用于编码图像块，包括：
    如权利要求28至54任一项所述的帧间预测装置，其中所述帧间预测装置用于基于目标候选运动信息预测当前编码图像块的运动信息，基于所述当前编码图像块的运动信息确定所述当前编码图像块的预测像素值；
    熵编码模块，用于将所述目标候选运动信息的索引标识编入码流，所述索引标识指示 用于所述当前编码图像块的所述目标候选运动信息；
    重建模块，用于基于所述预测像素值重建所述当前编码图像块。
  56. 一种视频解码器，其特征在于，所述视频解码器用于从码流中解码出图像块，包括：
    熵解码模块，用于从码流中解码出索引标识，所述索引标识用于指示当前解码图像块的目标候选运动信息；
    如权利要求28至54任一项所述的帧间预测装置，所述帧间预测装置用于基于所述索引标识指示的目标候选运动信息预测当前解码图像块的运动信息，基于所述当前解码图像块的运动信息确定所述当前解码图像块的预测像素值；
    重建模块，用于基于所述预测像素值重建所述当前解码图像块。
  57. 一种视频编解码设备，包括：相互耦合的非易失性存储器和处理器，所述处理器调用存储在所述存储器中的程序代码以执行如权利要求1-27任一项所描述的方法。
  58. 一种帧间预测方法，其特征在于，待处理块包括一个或多个子块，所述方法包括：
    获取所述待处理块的空域相邻块；
    根据所述空域相邻块，获得时域偏移矢量，所述时域偏移矢量用于确定所述待处理块的子块的对应子块，其中，
    在所述空域相邻块具有位于第一参考帧列表中的第一向参考帧，且所述对应子块所在的图像帧和所述第一向参考帧相同的情况下，所述时域偏移矢量为所述空域相邻块的第一向运动矢量，所述第一向运动矢量对应于所述第一向参考帧。
  59. 根据权利要求58所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述空域相邻块不具有位于第一参考帧列表中的第一向参考帧，或所述对应子块所在的图像帧和所述第一向参考帧不同的情况下，还包括：
    在所述空域相邻块具有位于第二参考帧列表中的第二向参考帧，且所述对应子块所在的图像帧和所述第二向参考帧相同的情况下，所述时域偏移矢量为所述空域相邻块的第二向运动矢量，所述第二向运动矢量对应于所述第二向参考帧。
  60. 根据权利要求58或59所述的方法，其特征在于，所述获取所述待处理块的空域相邻块，包括：
    检查所述空域相邻块是否可得；
    在所述空域相邻块可得的情况下，获取所述空域相邻块。
  61. 根据权利要求58至60任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述对应子块所在的图像帧和所述第一向参考帧相同，包括：
    所述对应子块所在的图像帧的POC和所述第一向参考帧的POC相同。
  62. 根据权利要求59至61任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述对应子块所在的图像帧和所述第二向参考帧相同，包括：
    所述对应子块所在的图像帧的POC和所述第二向参考帧的POC相同。
  63. 根据权利要求58至62任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：
    解析码流以获得所述对应子块所在的图像帧的索引信息。
  64. 根据权利要求58至62任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，还包括：
    将与所述待处理块具有预设关系的图像帧作为所述对应子块所在的图像帧。
  65. 根据权利要求64所述的方法，其特征在于，所述预设关系，包括：
    所述对应子块所在的图像帧在解码顺序上与所述待处理块所在的图像帧相邻，且早于所述待处理块所在的图像帧解码。
  66. 根据权利要求64所述的方法，其特征在于，所述预设关系，包括：
    所述对应子块所在的图像帧为所述待处理块的第一向参考帧列表或第二向参考帧列表中参考帧索引为0的参考帧。
  67. 根据权利要求58至66任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述空域相邻块不具有位于第二参考帧列表中的第二向参考帧，或所述对应子块所在的图像帧和所述第二向参考帧不同的情况下，还包括：
    将零运动矢量作为所述时域偏移矢量。
  68. 一种视频编解码设备，包括：相互耦合的非易失性存储器和处理器，所述处理器调用存储在所述存储器中的程序代码以执行如权利要求58-67任一项所描述的方法。
PCT/CN2019/100751 2019-05-17 2019-08-15 一种帧间预测的方法和装置 Ceased WO2020232845A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (17)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201980015456.6A CN112243586A (zh) 2019-05-17 2019-08-15 一种帧间预测的方法和装置
KR1020257017410A KR20250078641A (ko) 2019-05-17 2019-08-15 인터 예측 방법 및 장치
EP19929484.4A EP3955576B1 (en) 2019-05-17 2019-08-15 Inter-frame prediction method and device
PL19929484.4T PL3955576T3 (pl) 2019-05-17 2019-08-15 Sposób i urządzenie do predykcji międzyobrazowej
EP24201023.9A EP4518316A3 (en) 2019-05-17 2019-08-15 Inter prediction method and apparatus
BR112021023118A BR112021023118A2 (pt) 2019-05-17 2019-08-15 Método e aparelho de interpredição
KR1020217038708A KR102814842B1 (ko) 2019-05-17 2019-08-15 인터 예측 방법 및 장치
ES19929484T ES3010207T3 (en) 2019-05-17 2019-08-15 Inter-frame prediction method and device
MX2021013316A MX2021013316A (es) 2019-05-17 2019-08-15 Metodo y aparato de inter prediccion.
JP2021568601A JP7318007B2 (ja) 2019-05-17 2019-08-15 インター予測方法および装置
DK19929484.4T DK3955576T3 (da) 2019-05-17 2019-08-15 Fremgangsmåde og anordning til interframe-forudsigelse
FIEP19929484.4T FI3955576T3 (fi) 2019-05-17 2019-08-15 Kehysten välinen ennustusmenetelmä ja -laite
MX2025003391A MX2025003391A (es) 2019-05-17 2021-10-29 Metodo y aparato de inter prediccion
US17/529,106 US12108046B2 (en) 2019-05-17 2021-11-17 Inter prediction method and apparatus
JP2023117744A JP7547574B2 (ja) 2019-05-17 2023-07-19 インター予測方法および装置
US18/882,668 US12519948B2 (en) 2019-05-17 2024-09-11 Inter prediction method and apparatus
US19/407,477 US20260106992A1 (en) 2019-05-17 2025-12-03 Inter prediction method and apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN201910414914.5 2019-05-17
CN201910414914.5A CN111953995A (zh) 2019-05-17 2019-05-17 一种帧间预测的方法和装置

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US17/529,106 Continuation US12108046B2 (en) 2019-05-17 2021-11-17 Inter prediction method and apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2020232845A1 true WO2020232845A1 (zh) 2020-11-26

Family

ID=73336807

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2019/100751 Ceased WO2020232845A1 (zh) 2019-05-17 2019-08-15 一种帧间预测的方法和装置

Country Status (14)

Country Link
US (3) US12108046B2 (zh)
EP (2) EP3955576B1 (zh)
JP (2) JP7318007B2 (zh)
KR (2) KR102814842B1 (zh)
CN (2) CN111953995A (zh)
BR (1) BR112021023118A2 (zh)
DK (1) DK3955576T3 (zh)
ES (1) ES3010207T3 (zh)
FI (1) FI3955576T3 (zh)
HU (1) HUE069769T2 (zh)
MX (2) MX2021013316A (zh)
PL (1) PL3955576T3 (zh)
PT (1) PT3955576T (zh)
WO (1) WO2020232845A1 (zh)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2024508193A (ja) * 2021-03-19 2024-02-22 杭州海康威視数字技術股▲フン▼有限公司 復号方法、符号化方法、装置、デバイスおよび記憶媒体
JP2025506045A (ja) * 2022-02-15 2025-03-05 エルジー エレクトロニクス インコーポレイティド 画像符号化／復号化方法、ビットストリームを伝送する方法、及びビットストリームを保存した記録媒体

Families Citing this family (11)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN120751158A (zh) * 2019-06-27 2025-10-03 三星电子株式会社 视频编码方法和视频解码方法
US20230059035A1 (en) * 2021-08-23 2023-02-23 Netflix, Inc. Efficient encoding of film grain noise
US12238294B2 (en) * 2022-04-18 2025-02-25 Tencent America LLC Sub-block based temporal motion vector predictor with an motion vector offset
US12425602B2 (en) * 2022-05-25 2025-09-23 Tencent America LLC Subblock level temporal motion vector prediction with multiple displacement vector predictors and an offset
WO2024005456A1 (ko) * 2022-06-27 2024-01-04 현대자동차주식회사 영상 부호화/복호화 방법, 장치 및 비트스트림을 저장한 기록 매체
CN119654864A (zh) 2022-08-18 2025-03-18 三星电子株式会社 使用ai的图像解码设备和图像编码设备以及利用该设备的方法
WO2024151335A1 (en) * 2023-01-09 2024-07-18 Tencent America LLC Subblock based motion vector predictor with mv offset in amvp mode
US12464133B2 (en) 2023-02-02 2025-11-04 Tencent America LLC Smooth sub-block motion vector prediction
US12563217B2 (en) * 2023-04-14 2026-02-24 Tencent America LLC Systems and methods for candidate list construction
JP7853591B2 (ja) * 2023-09-21 2026-04-30 サミー株式会社 ぱちんこ遊技機
CN118337962B (zh) * 2024-06-12 2024-09-03 湖南中泓汇智智能科技有限公司 一种用于超视距远程驾驶平台的5g网络数据传输方法

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102917197A (zh) * 2011-08-04 2013-02-06 想象技术有限公司 运动估计系统中的外部矢量
WO2017138352A1 (en) * 2016-02-08 2017-08-17 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Systems and methods for transform coefficient coding

Family Cites Families (6)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TW201436531A (zh) * 2012-09-28 2014-09-16 Vid Scale Inc 多層視訊編碼適應性升取樣
US11477477B2 (en) 2015-01-26 2022-10-18 Qualcomm Incorporated Sub-prediction unit based advanced temporal motion vector prediction
US20160337662A1 (en) 2015-05-11 2016-11-17 Qualcomm Incorporated Storage and signaling resolutions of motion vectors
CN116567220A (zh) * 2016-08-11 2023-08-08 Lx 半导体科技有限公司 图像编码/解码设备和图像数据的发送设备
CN109587479B (zh) 2017-09-29 2023-11-10 华为技术有限公司 视频图像的帧间预测方法、装置及编解码器
CN119922329A (zh) 2017-11-01 2025-05-02 交互数字Vc控股公司 用于合并模式的解码器侧运动矢量细化和子块运动导出

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN102917197A (zh) * 2011-08-04 2013-02-06 想象技术有限公司 运动估计系统中的外部矢量
WO2017138352A1 (en) * 2016-02-08 2017-08-17 Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha Systems and methods for transform coefficient coding

Non-Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
LIN, JIANLIANG ET AL.: "Motion Vector Coding in the HEVC Standard", IEEE JOURNAL OF SELECTED TOPICS IN SIGNAL PROCESSING, vol. 7, no. 6, 31 December 2013 (2013-12-31), XP055238578, DOI: 20200109090229X *
SHINOBU, KUDO ET AL.: "Motion Vector Prediction Methods Considering Prediction Continuity in HEVC", 2016 PICTURE CODING SYMPOSIUM, 31 December 2016 (2016-12-31), XP033086849, DOI: 20200109090237X *

Cited By (8)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2024508193A (ja) * 2021-03-19 2024-02-22 杭州海康威視数字技術股▲フン▼有限公司 復号方法、符号化方法、装置、デバイスおよび記憶媒体
JP7494403B2 (ja) 2021-03-19 2024-06-03 杭州海康威視数字技術股▲フン▼有限公司 復号方法、符号化方法、装置、デバイスおよび記憶媒体
JP2024098086A (ja) * 2021-03-19 2024-07-19 杭州海康威視数字技術股▲フン▼有限公司 復号方法、符号化方法、装置、デバイスおよび記憶媒体
US12063386B2 (en) 2021-03-19 2024-08-13 Hangzhou Hikvision Digital Technology Co., Ltd. Methods, apparatuses, devices, and storage media for encoding or decoding
JP7655474B2 (ja) 2021-03-19 2025-04-02 杭州海康威視数字技術股▲フン▼有限公司 復号方法、符号化方法、装置、デバイスおよび記憶媒体
US12574543B2 (en) 2021-03-19 2026-03-10 Hangzhou Hikvision Digital Technology Co., Ltd. Methods, apparatuses, devices, and storage media for encoding or decoding
JP2025506045A (ja) * 2022-02-15 2025-03-05 エルジー エレクトロニクス インコーポレイティド 画像符号化／復号化方法、ビットストリームを伝送する方法、及びビットストリームを保存した記録媒体
JP7741336B2 (ja) 2022-02-15 2025-09-17 エルジー エレクトロニクス インコーポレイティド 画像符号化／復号化方法、ビットストリームを伝送する方法、及びビットストリームを保存した記録媒体

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN111953995A (zh) 2020-11-17
JP7547574B2 (ja) 2024-09-09
DK3955576T3 (da) 2025-02-10
KR102814842B1 (ko) 2025-05-28
HUE069769T2 (hu) 2025-04-28
BR112021023118A2 (pt) 2022-01-04
US20250080748A1 (en) 2025-03-06
JP2022532670A (ja) 2022-07-15
US20260106992A1 (en) 2026-04-16
KR20250078641A (ko) 2025-06-02
US20220078441A1 (en) 2022-03-10
EP3955576A4 (en) 2022-07-27
PT3955576T (pt) 2025-02-10
EP4518316A2 (en) 2025-03-05
JP2023156315A (ja) 2023-10-24
MX2025003391A (es) 2025-05-02
PL3955576T3 (pl) 2025-03-03
ES3010207T3 (en) 2025-04-01
EP3955576A1 (en) 2022-02-16
US12519948B2 (en) 2026-01-06
CN112243586A (zh) 2021-01-19
MX2021013316A (es) 2021-12-10
EP4518316A3 (en) 2025-05-28
EP3955576B1 (en) 2024-11-06
US12108046B2 (en) 2024-10-01
FI3955576T3 (fi) 2025-02-12
JP7318007B2 (ja) 2023-07-31
KR20220003037A (ko) 2022-01-07

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US12519948B2 (en) Inter prediction method and apparatus
CN113545040B (zh) 用于多假设编码的加权预测方法及装置
CN115243039B (zh) 一种视频图像预测方法及装置
CN111953997B (zh) 候选运动矢量列表获取方法、装置及编解码器
CN111788833B (zh) 帧间预测方法、装置以及相应的编码器和解码器
WO2020182194A1 (zh) 帧间预测的方法及相关装置
US12531975B2 (en) Picture prediction method and apparatus, and computer-readable storage medium
CN111526362B (zh) 帧间预测方法和装置
WO2020259567A1 (zh) 视频编码器、视频解码器及相应方法
CN114270847B (zh) 融合候选运动信息列表的构建方法、装置及编解码器
AU2020261145B2 (en) Picture prediction method and apparatus, and computer-readable storage medium
CN112153389B (zh) 一种帧间预测的方法和装置
CN111432219B (zh) 一种帧间预测方法及装置
CN113366850B (zh) 视频编码器、视频解码器及相应方法
CN112135137B (zh) 视频编码器、视频解码器及相应方法
WO2020155791A1 (zh) 帧间预测方法和装置
CN113615191A (zh) 图像显示顺序的确定方法、装置和视频编解码设备
WO2020187062A1 (zh) 用于融合运动矢量差技术的优化方法、装置及编解码器
WO2020186882A1 (zh) 基于三角预测单元模式的处理方法及装置

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 19929484

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2021568601

Country of ref document: JP

Kind code of ref document: A

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 20217038708

Country of ref document: KR

Kind code of ref document: A

REG Reference to national code

Ref country code: BR

Ref legal event code: B01A

Ref document number: 112021023118

Country of ref document: BR

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2019929484

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20211111

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 112021023118

Country of ref document: BR

Kind code of ref document: A2

Effective date: 20211117

WWG Wipo information: grant in national office

Ref document number: MX/A/2021/013316

Country of ref document: MX

WWD Wipo information: divisional of initial pct application

Ref document number: 1020257017410

Country of ref document: KR

WWP Wipo information: published in national office

Ref document number: 1020257017410

Country of ref document: KR